HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series

HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series
Course Description
This course provides service and support information for the HP Officejet Pro X451
and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series products. Topics
include features, architecture, and functionality of the product. Detailed information
is also provided on removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair
(CSR) parts.
After completing this course, you should be able to set up, configure, and service
the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576
MFP Series products as well as provide technical sales support for both products.
Audience
 Service engineers
 Support engineers
 Field service engineers
 Solution architects
Length
Approximately three hours
Course Description
This course provides service and support information for the HP Officejet Pro X451
and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series products. Topics
include features, architecture, and functionality of the product. Detailed information
is also provided on removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair
(CSR) parts.
After completing this course, you should be able to set up, configure, and service
the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576
MFP Series products as well as provide technical sales support for both products.
Audience
 Service engineers
 Support engineers
 Field service engineers
 Solution architects
Length
Approximately three hours
Product overview
The HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series are suitable for the small and medium businesses. The HP Officejet Pro X451 and
X551 Series is a single-function peripheral (SFP). The HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576
MFP Series is a multi-function peripheral (MFP).
HP Officejet Pro X Series printers and MFPs can deliver up to twice the speed at up to half
the printing cost compared with color laser printers. This new class of devices is powered
by HP PageWide Technology, the next-generation inkjet platform that sets a new standard
for small work team printing, producing high-quality documents at up to 70 pages per
minute.
Both products share the same print engine, supplies, and accessories. The major
difference between the two products is that the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series has a built-in scanner and document feeder.
New features—HP PageWide Technology

HP PageWide Technology enables the high performance and robust print quality of
HP Officejet Pro X Series printers.
HP PageWide Technology includes the following features:
 Page-wide printhead with a nozzle density of 1,200 per inch for each of four
colors.
 Controlled ink-paper interactions using HP pigment inks.
 Precision paper motion control.
 Automatic nozzle performance measurement.
 Active and passive nozzle substitution.
 Automated printhead service routines that can restore nozzle operation.
HP PageWide Technology offers the following advantages:
 High print speeds and fast first page out.

 Significant power savings by eliminating the fuser required for toner-based
printing technologies.
 Precise paper motion control, reducing paper pick and jam failure rates.
NOTE: The course library contains a technical white paper describing HP PageWide

Technology.
HP Officejet Pro X451dn SFP

Speed
 Prints up to 36 pages per minute (ISO)

 First page out of product in 9.5 seconds
Memory and storage
 512 MB
Print
 Prints up to 55 pages per minute (general office mode)

 Automatic duplex printing
User interface
 2.0-inch MGD (monochrome graphics) adjustable angle display
Connectivity
 Hi-speed USB 2.0

 10/100 Ethernet LAN connection
Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 IPP over TLS (port 443–excludes AirPrint)
 Device firewall configuration
 Control panel lock
 Password protect EWS
 Enable/disable network ports and device features
 Syslog
 Certificate support
 Signed firmware
 Administrator settings
Mobile printing
 HP ePrint via email

 HP ePrint Mobile Apps
 Google Cloud Print
 Apple AirPrintTM
HP Officejet Pro X451dw SFP

Speed

Memory and storage
 512 MB
Print

User interface
 2.0-inch MGD (monochrome graphics) adjustable angle display
Connectivity
 8.02.11 B/G/N Single Band wireless adapter
 HP Wireless Direct
Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 Syslog
 Signed firmware
Mobile printing

HP Officejet Pro X551dw SFP

Speed

Memory and storage
 512 MB
Print

 Plug and Print USB Drive printing (no computer required)
User interface
 4.3-inch color graphics touchscreen adjustable angle display
Connectivity

 802.11 B/G/N Single Band wireless adapter
Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 IPP over TLS
 802.1x wireless authentication (EAP-TLS, LEAP, PEAP)
 Pre-shared key authentication (PSK)
 Syslog
 Signed firmware
Mobile printing
 HP Wireless Direct printing

HP Officejet Pro X476dn MFP

Speed

 Copies up to 36 pages per minute (ISO)
 Scans up to 20 images per minute monochrome and 15 images per minute color
Memory and storage
 768 MB
Print

Copy
 Copies up to 20 pages per minute monochrome and 15 pages per minute color
 50-page document feeder
 Automatic duplex copying
Scan
 Automatic duplex scanning
 Scan to Memory Device (no computer required)
Fax
 v.34 with an RJ-11 fax port
User interface
Connectivity

Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 Unused protocol and service disablement
 Syslog
 Signed firmware
Mobile printing
 HP ePrint
HP Officejet Pro X476dw MFP

Speed

Memory and storage
 768 MB
Print
Copy
Scan

Fax
User interface
Connectivity

 802.11 B/G/N Single Band wireless
 HP ePrint
Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 Pre-Shared Key authentication for wireless (PKS)
 Syslog
 Signed firmware
Mobile printing

HP Officejet Pro X576dw MFP

Speed

Memory and storage
 768 MB
Print

Copy
Scan

Fax
User interface
Connectivity

 802.11 B/G/N Single Band wireless
Security features
 SHL/TLS (HTTPS)
 IPP over TLS
 Pre-Shared Key authentication for wireless (PKS)
 Syslog
 Signed firmware
 Scan-to and Fax-to folder authentication
Mobile printing

 HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series
Model name/Model X451dn/

X451dw/CN463A X551dw/CN596A
number CN459
Features
Tray 1 (50-sheet
√ √ √
capacity)
Tray 2 (500-sheet
√ √ √
capacity)
Optional Tray 3 (500-

√ √ √
sheet capacity)
Automatic duplex
√ √ √
printing
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 √ √ √

Model name/Model X451dn/
X451dw/CN463A X551dw/CN596A
number CN459
Features
10/100 Ethernet LAN

√ √ √
connection
801.11 B/G/N Single

√ √
Band wireless adapter
HP Wireless Direct
√ √
printing
Plug and Print USB

Drive printing (no √
computer required)
Touchscreen control
√
panel
HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series
Model
X476dn/
name//Model X476dw/CN461A X576dw/CN462A
CN460A
number
Features
Tray 1 (50-sheet
√ √ √
capacity)
Tray 2 (500-sheet
√ √ √
capacity)
Model
X476dn/
CN460A
number
Features
Optional Tray 3
√ √ √
(500-sheet capacity)
Document Feeder
Tray (50–sheet √ √ √
capacity)
Automatic duplex
printing, copying, √ √ √
and scanning
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 √ √ √
10/100 Ethernet
√ √ √
LAN connection
802.11 B/G/N
Single Band √ √
wireless adapter
HP Wireless Direct
√ √
printing
Plug and Print USB

Drive printing (no √ √ √
computer required)
Fax √ √ √
Model
X476dn/
CN460A
number
Features
Copy and Scan √ √ √
Scan to Memory
Device (no √ √ √
computer required)
Touchscreen
√ √ √
control panel
Paper handling overview

Input trays and feeders:
 The HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and

X576 MFP Series accept the same input trays.
 Both products accept the same paper sizes and weights. Find complete
specifications at the product-specific support sites or by searching the product
model number on http://www.hp.com.
Output bins and finishing products:
 All models and bundles have a built-in output bin with a capacity of 250
sheets.
 Officejet Pro X Series printers do not support finishing products.
Input trays and feeders

Built-in input trays
HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series:
 Tray 1: 50-sheet capacity multi-purpose tray that folds down on the left side of
the product
 Tray 2: 500-sheet capacity tray located at the bottom of the print engine,
accessible from the front of the product
HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series:
 Tray 1: 50-sheet capacity multi-purpose tray that folds down on the left side of
the product
accessible from the front of the product
 Document feeder tray: 50-page document feeder for two-sided scan, copy,
and fax
Optional accessory trays

HP Officejet Pro X Series Printers and MFPs:
 Tray 3: 500-sheet capacity optional accessory tray (CN595A)
Supported paper size for trays

Tray 1
 Letter: 126 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)

 Oficio (8.5 x 13): 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
 Oficio (216 x 340): 216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in)
 Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
 A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in)
 Executive: 184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in)
 Statement: 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)
 A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
 A6:105 x 148 mm (4.2 x 5.8 in)
 B5 (JIS): 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in)
 B6 (JIS):128 x 182 mm (5 x 7 in)
 16K 195 x 270 mm:195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 in)
 16K 184 x 260 mm:184 x 260 mm (7.2 x 10.2 in)
 16K 197 x 273 mm: 197 x 273 mm (7.8 x 10.8 in)
 Custom: width (3 to 8.5 in), length (5 to 14 in)
Tray 2
 Letter: 126 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)

 A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in)
 A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
 B5 (JIS): 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in)
 16K 195 x 270 mm:195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 in)
 16K 184 x 260 mm:184 x 260 mm (7.2 x 10.2 in)
 16K 197 x 273 mm: 197 x 273 mm (7.8 x 10.8 in)
 Custom: width (4 to 8.5 in), length (8.27 to 11.7 in)
Optional Tray 3
 Letter: 126 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)

 Oficio (8.5 x 13): 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
 Oficio (216 x 340): 216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in)
 Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
 A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in)
 A5: 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in)
 B5 (JIS): 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in)
 16K 195 x 270 mm:195 x 270 mm (7.7 x 10.6 in)
 16K 184 x 260 mm:184 x 260 mm (7.2 x 10.2 in)
 16K 197 x 273 mm: 197 x 273 mm (7.8 x 10.8 in)
 Custom: width (4 to 8.5 in), length (8.27 to 14 in)
Supported envelope sizes for trays

Tray 1
 Envelope #10: 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in)

 Envelope DL: 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in)
 Envelope C5: 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in)
 Envelope B5: 176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in)
 Envelope C6: 114 x 162 mm (4.5 x 6.4in)
 Envelope Monarch: 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)
 Japanese Envelope Chou #3: 120 x 235 mm (4.7 x 9.3 in)
Tray 2
 Envelope #10: 105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in)

 Envelope DL: 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in)
 Envelope C5: 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in)
 Envelope B5: 176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in)
Optional Tray 3
 Tray 3 does not support envelopes
Supported paper types for trays

Tray 1
 Unspecified and Plain

 HP EcoSMART Lite
 Light 60-74g
 Intermediate 85-95g
 Mid-Weight 96-110g
 Heavy 111-130g
 HP Premium Presentation Matte 120g
 Extra Heavy 131-175g
 HP Brochure Matte 180g
 HP Brochure Glossy 180g
 Cardstock 176-220g
 HP Cover Matte 200g
 HP Advanced Photo Papers
 Envelope
 Heavy Envelope
 Labels
Tray 2

 Light 60-74g
 Heavy 111-130g
 Envelope
 Heavy Envelope
 Labels
Optional Tray 3

 Light 60-74g
 Heavy 111-130g
NOTE: Tray 3 does not support envelope printing
Copy and scan features (HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series only)
The HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series has a built-in flatbed scanner and
document feeder. The flatbed scanner and document feeder are used to copy or scan
documents.
Flatbed scanner:
 Accepts page size up to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Document feeder:
 Holds up to 50-pages
 Accepts page size up to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
 Supports automatic duplex scanning
All models and bundles in the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series can
perform the following tasks:
 Print black and white or color copies of single-page or multiple-page

documents
 Scan black and white or color documents or images for the following:
o Fax from the flatbed scanner or document feeder
o Scan to USB Drive from the product control panel
o Use HP software to scan documents into editable text
o Scan to device memory
Product front view (X551 Series)
1. Control panel
2. Output bin door
3. Output bin
4. Output bin extension
5. Tray 2 (Main paper tray)
6. On/Off button
7. Ink cartridge door
8. USB 2.0 Host port that accepts USB storage devices for Plug and Print USB
Drive printing
Product front view (X451 Series)
1. Control panel
2. Output bin door
3. Output bin
6. On/Off button
Product back view

1. Left door (access for clearing jams)
2. Tray 1 (Multi-purpose tray)
3. Power connection
4. Hi-speed USB 2.0 ports
5. Ethernet port
Interface ports
1. Ethernet port
2. USB Device port accepts a USB cable from a PC (alternative to Network and
Wireless connections)
3. USB Host port accepts USB storage device for Plug and Print (Officejet Pro
X551 only)
4. Serial number and model number location

5. Open the ink cartridge door to view the serial number and product model number
label.
Control panel view (X451 Series)
1. Display screen area

2. Help button: provides access to the product help system
3. Wireless button: provides menu items to view and adjust network settings
on wireless models
4. HP ePrint button: provides quick access to HP Web Services features,
including HP ePrint
5. Cancel button: cancels the current job or exits the current screen
6. Back button: returns to the previous screen
7. Home button: provides quick access to the Home screen
Loaded: 0%
Progress: 0%
NOTE: Buttons illuminate only when the current screen can use the feature.
Buttons on the Home screen (X451 Series)

The Home screen provides access to the product features, and it indicates the product
status.
NOTE: Depending on the product configuration, the features on the Home screen can
vary. The layout might also be reversed for some languages.
1. Setup button: provides menu items to view and adjust product settings
2. Job Status button: view status of any current print job
3. Ink Information button: provides information in ink levels
Control panel view (X551 Series)
1. Display and touch screen area

3. Right arrow button: moves the cursor to the right or moves the display
image to the next screen
4. Cancel button: cancels the current job or exists the current screen
6. Left arrow button: moves the cursor to the left
8. Wireless light: indicates the wireless network is enabled
The wireless light blinks while the product is establishing a connection to the
wireless network. When connected, the light stops blinking and stays lit.
Buttons on the Home screen (X551 Series)

The Home screen provides access to the product feature, and indicates product status.
NOTE: Depending on the product configuration, the features on the Home screen can vary.
The layout might also be reversed for some languages.
1. Web Services button: provides quick access to HP Web Services features,

including HP ePrint
HP ePrint is a tool that prints documents by using any email enabled device
to send them to the product’s email address.
2. Network button: provides access to network settings and information

From the network settings screen, you can print the Network Summary
page, set up a wireless network connection, and access advanced network
settings. The wireless network feature is only available on select models.
NOTE: When you are connected to a wireless network, this icon
changes to a set of signal strength bars.
3. Eco settings button: provides a list of options to help reduce energy and
paper consumption
4. Supplies button: provides information about supplies status
From the supplies summary screen, you can print the Supplies Status page.
5. Setup button: provides a list of available fax reports and settings

6. Plug and Print button: provides access to the Plug and Print USB Drive
printing feature (no computer is required)
7. Status display: provides status information when the product is processing
a job
When the product is idle, this area of the control panel displays the time and
date and allows for access to the time and date settings by touching this
area.
When the product is processing a job, job status information replaces the
time and date display.
8. Apps button: provides access to the Apps menu to print directly from select
Web applications
Control panel Help system
 The HP Officejet Pro X series has a built-in Help system that explains how to
use each screen. To open the Help system on the Officejet Pro X551 touch
the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
 For screens that contain settings for individual tasks, Help opens to a topic
that explains the options for that task.
 If the product alerts you of an error or warning, touch the Help button to open
a message that describes the problem. The message also contains instruction
to help solve the problem.
Product front view
1. Document feeder cover, provides access for clearing jams

2. Document feeder input tray
3. Document feeder input tray extension
4. Document feeder output bin
6. Output bin
8. On/Off button
10. Color touchscreen control panel
11. USB 2.0 port
IMPORTANT! Caution should be taken when moving the printer since tilting at an angle of
more than 15 degrees could result in ink leakage, especially soon after startup.
Product back view
1. Left door (access for clearing jams)

2. Tray 1 (Multi-purpose tray)
3. Power connection
4. Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ports
5. Ethernet port
6. Fax line port
Interface ports
1. Fax line port

2. Ethernet port
3. USB Host port
NOTE: A second USB Host port is located on the front of the product
behind the control panel.
4. USB Device port
Control panel view
1. Display and touch screen area

3. Right arrow button: moves the cursor to the right or moves the display
image to the next screen
4. Cancel button: cancels the current job or exits the current screen
6. Left arrow button: moves the cursor to the left
8. Wireless light: indicates the wireless network is enabled.
The wireless light blinks while the product is establishing a connection to the
wireless network. When connected, the light stops blinking and stays lit.
Buttons on the Home Screen
1. Web Services button: provides quick access to HP Web Services features,

including HP ePrint
HP ePrint is a tool that prints documents by using any email enabled device
to send them to the product’s email address.
2. Network button: provides access to network settings and information

From the network settings screen, you can print the Network Summary
page, set up a wireless network connection, and access advanced network
settings.
The wireless network feature is only available on select models.
NOTE: When you are connected to a wireless network, this icon
changes to a set of signal strength bars.
3. Eco settings button: provides a list of options to help reduce energy and
paper consumption
4. Fax Status button: provides a list of available fax reports and settings
5. Supplies button: provides information about supplies status
From the supplies summary screen, you can print the Supplies Status page.
6. Apps button: provides access to the Apps menu to print directly from select
Web applications
7. Scan button: provides access to the scan feature
8. Status display: provides job status information when the product is
processing a job
When the product is idle, this area of the control panel displays the time and
date and allows for access to the time and date settings by touching this
area.
When the product is processing a job, job status information replaces the
time and date display.
9. Fax button: provides access to the fax feature

10. Copy button: provides access to the copy feature
From the Home screen you can touch the right arrow button of the Control Panel to access
the USB Doc Print button and Setup button. The USB Doc Print button provides

access to the Plug and Print USB Drive printing and scanning feature (no computer is
required). The Setup button provides access to the product settings.
Control panel Help system
 The HP Officejet Pro X series has a built-in Help system that explains how to
use each screen. To open the Help system on the Officejet Pro X476 and
X576, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the control panel.
 For some screens Help opens to a global menu where you can search for
specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the
buttons in the menu.
 Some Help screens include animations that guide you through procedures,
such as clearing paper jams.
 For screens that contain settings for individual tasks, Help opens to a topic
that explains the options for that task.
Supported operating systems and printer drivers for Windows

The product supports the following Windows operating systems:
Recommended
software
installation Print and scan drivers only
 Windows XP SP3 or  Windows 2003 Server (32-bit, Service Pack

greater (32-bit) 3)
 Windows Vista (32-bit  Windows 2008 Server
and 64-bit)  Windows 2008 Server R2
 Windows 7 (32-bit
and 64-bit) NOTE: Windows Server install
 Windows 8 (32-bit support is available through the
and 64-bit) Enterprise (command line) install
 Windows 8 Pro (32- method only.
bit and 64-bit)
The product supports the following Windows printer drivers:

 HP PCL 6 (this is the default printer driver and is included on the CD)
 HP Universal Print Driver for Windows Postscript
 HP Universal Print Driver for PCL 5
 HP Universal Print Driver for PCL 6
NOTE: For downloads of, and more information about, the HP UPD Postscript, PCL 5, and
PCL 6 drivers, see www.hp.com/go/upd.
Supported operating systems and printer drivers for Mac

The HP Officejet software installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files,
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Utility for use with Mac OS X computers.
The HP printer PPD and PDE files, in combination with the built-in Apple PostScript printer
drivers, provide full printing functionality and access to specific HP printer features.
The product supports the following Mac operating systems:
 Mac OS X 10.6
NOTE: See www.hp.com/support for the latest drivers for Mac.
Remote management
Most product features can be enabled or configured using the control panel. Enterprise
customers might need to manage products located in remote offices or need to manage a
fleet of products.
Remote management options include:
 HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Web-based tool used to monitor the product, enable product features, and
configure product settings.
Included with the product.
Additional information is included in other sections of this course.
 HP Web Jetadmin
Enables administrators to remotely manage individual products or a fleet of

products on a network.
Free utility from HP.
 HP Digital Sending Software (DSS)
Enables administrators to control the digital sending features of MFPs and

route incoming and outgoing network traffic through a centralized server.
Licensed product from HP, licenses must be purchased from HP.
 HP Imaging and Printing Security Center (IPSC)
Enables administrators to use HP IPSC to create and apply security policies

to networked HP products.
HP IPSC can assess products on the network and make sure that printing,
imaging and digital-sending features conform to predefined security policies.
NOTE: More information about each of the remote-management options is at www.hp.com.
Search Grow@hp for updated training resources for each of the products.
Set up Wizards
Setup Wizards
Setup Wizards guide the user through the steps necessary to enable and configure the
basic settings of certain features. Additional settings might need to be configured using the
product control panel menus or the product EWS.
Available Wizards include:
 Security Wizard
 Email Setup Wizard
 Fax Setup Wizard
 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty Statement
DURATION OF LIMITED
HP PRODUCT
WARRANTY
HP Officejet Pro X451dn, X451dw,

X551dw
1 year
HP Officejet Pro X475dw and X576dw
 HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will
be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for
the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the
warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove
to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in
performance to new.
 HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming
instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to
defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software
which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
 HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error
free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a
condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon
prompt return of the product.
 HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance
or may have been subject to incidental use.
 Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate
maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied
by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the
published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site
preparation or maintenance.
 TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some
countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not
apply to you.
 THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY
AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS
APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Student performance objectives

By the completion of this module, students should be able to:
 Understand how the products are packaged for shipping.

 Set up the product hardware.
 Print a Configuration Page to test the product.
 Install the print driver on Windows and Mac OS computers.
 Understand the methods for enabling and configuring product features.
 Setup and install the product overview

 This section describes how to unpack, set up, and test the product hardware. When
all the steps in this section are complete, the product will be operational, but not
fully configured. Advanced features and settings can be enabled and configured
using the instructions shown in the Use and Maintain module of this course.
Installation and setup guides

The course library contains two types of installation guides:
 A Hardware Installation Guide (HIG) is shipped with the product and most
accessories. The HIG is designed to give a customer step-by-step instructions
on unpacking and installing a hardware component using illustrations and a
minimum amount of text.
 The On-site Installation and Setup Guide provides information necessary to
install and setup the product for a customer site. The On-site Installation and
Setup Guide is not available to the public.
The On-site Installation and Setup Guide includes the following information:
 Product introduction and images of the product models

 List of customer responsibilities
 Customer walkaround
 Connect the product to a network
 Install the software on a single PC
 Repackaging an old printer
 Links to additional product information
 Select a site
 Select a sturdy surface in a well-ventilated, dust-free area, away from direct
sunlight to position the product. It is important that the product sits on a level
surface.
 The product is approximately 517 mm (20.3 in) wide by 399 mm (15.7 in) deep.
Provide an additional 1 m (39 in) of clearance on the left side of the product for
opening Tray 1 and the access door. Allow for sufficient space behind and in front
of the product for access and operation.
 IMPORTANT! This printer is designed to be used on a level surface. Operating the
printer when not level could result in inaccurate ink level readings.
 Unpack the boxes

 The documentation, In-box CD, and power cable are included in the box.

 NOTE: Recycle the packaging if the product is at the installation location. Keep the
packaging if the product will be shipped to another location.
 Install the ink cartridges overview

 The product needs the setup ink cartridges that came with the product to perform
the initial setup process. Once a SETUP cartridge has been used to initialize the
printer, it can be used in the same or a different printer until it is depleted. The
SETUP cartridges that came with the product cannot be used after the product has
been initialized. After initialization, remove the setup cartridges and install non-
setup cartridges.
 The product uses four colors and has a different ink cartridge for each color: yellow
(Y), cyan (C), magenta (M), and black (K).

 CAUTION: Ink cartridges are more prone to spills than toner cartridges. Moving the
printer with cartridges in it can cause ink spills that will foul the paper path as well
as the internal assemblies, causing a product malfunction.
 Remove the ink cartridge from the packaging

 NOTE: Do not touch the metal connector of the ink cartridge. Fingerprints on the
connector can cause print-quality problems.
 Insert the ink cartridges into the product

 NOTE: Make sure all packing material has been removed.
Tray 1
Tray 1 is the multi-purpose tray located on the left side of the product.
Click the Play button on the video to view the steps.
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Pull out the tray extension to support the paper.
3. Extend the paper guides fully and load the paper stack into Tray 1 with
the side to be printed on face-down and top of the page toward the front
of the tray.
4. Adjust the paper guides to the size of the paper.
Tray 2 or optional Tray 3
Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 are standard paper trays.
Click the Play button on the video to view the steps.
1. Pull the tray out of the product. Make sure that all packing material has been
removed.
2. Slide open the paper length and width guides.
3. Load paper into the tray with the side to be printed on face-up. Make sure
the paper is flat at all four corners.
4. Slide the side paper width guides so that they align with the paper-size
markings in the bottom of the tray.
5. Slide the front paper length guide so that it pushes the stack of paper
against the back of the tray.
6. Push down on the paper to make sure that the paper stack is below the
paper limit tabs on the side of the tray.
7. Slide the tray into the product.
Connect the Ethernet and Power cables
1. Connect the network cable to access a network through an Ethernet cable.
CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable now.
2. Connect the power cable between the product and a grounded ac outlet.
Turn on the product.
CAUTION: Make sure the power source is adequate for the product

voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product
uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz. To prevent
damage to the product, use only the power cable that is provided with
the product.
Print a Configuration Page

Verify that all installation steps have been completed, and then print a Configuration Page
from the control panel to complete the hardware setup.
Printing a Configuration Page does two important things:
 Tests the basic functionality of the product. The control panel, paper feed
system, print engine, and paper delivery system must all be functioning
correctly to successfully print a network configuration page.
 Provides a printed report that contains important information about the
product, this information is useful when configuring software and
troubleshooting.
To print a Configuration Page:

HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series
1. At the product control panel, press the Setup button.

2. Select the Print Reports menu.
3. Select Network Configuration Page.
1. Touch the Network button.

2. At the product control panel, touch the Print Reports menu.
3. Touch Network Configuration Page.
Upgrade the firmware

To verify that the firmware is current, first print a network configuration page to obtain the
product firmware date code.
After obtaining the product firmware date code, go to www.hp.com and use the
following procedure to determine if the firmware is current:
1. Click Support & Drivers.

2. Click Download drivers and software (and firmware).
3. In the For product box, type the product model number, and then click Go.
4. Click the link for the operating system.
5. Scroll to the Firmware section of the table.
If the version on the configuration page matches the version listed in the Firmware section
of the table, the product has the most current version.
If the versions are different, download the firmware upgrade, and then update the firmware
on the product by following the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: The product must be connected to a computer with internet access to upgrade
firmware.
Connect the product overview

This section covers the following methods for connecting the product:
 Connect the product using a USB cable

 Connect the product using an Ethernet cable
 Connect the product to a wireless network
Connect the product using a USB cable

CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable until the installation software displays a prompt.
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP
recommends using a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).
Use the following procedure to connect the product using a USB cable:
1. Quit all open programs on the computer.

2. Install the software from the CD, and follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: When installing the software on a Mac, click the HP Installer

icon to install the software.
3. When prompted, select USB-Connect the printer to the computer using a

USB cable, and then click Next.
NOTE: A dialog displays a warning that Web Services (HP ePrint and
print Apps) will not be available with a USB installation. Click Yes to
proceed with the USB installation, or click No to cancel the USB
installation.
4. When prompted, connect the USB cable to the computer and the product.
5. When the installation is complete, print a page from any program to make
sure that the printing software is correctly installed.
Connect the product on a network overview

Network-equipped products support the following protocols:
 TCP/IP (IPv4 or IPv6)

 LPD Printing
 SLP
 WS-Discovery
NOTE: While this product can be used over IPv6 networks, product software installation
from the CD is not supported over IPv6 networks.
Select from the following network equipped products for connection procedures:
 Install HP Officejet Pro X451dw and X551dw on a wired network

 Install HP Officejet Pro X476dw and X576dw on a wired network
Install the HP Officejet Pro X451dw and X551dw on a wired network
Obtain the IP address for the product:
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the product and to the network.
2. Turn the product on. Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time,
the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name
for the product.
3. At the product control panel, press the Setup button.

4. Touch the Print Reports menu, and then touch Network Configuration
Page.
5. Find the IP address on the network configuration page.
Install the software:
1. Quit all programs on the computer.

2. Install the software from the CD.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.
4. When prompted, select Wired Network - Connect the printer to your
network using an Ethernet cable, and then click the Next button.
5. Select the printer that has the correct IP address from the list of available
printers.
Install the HP Officejet Pro X476dw and X576dw on a wired network

Obtain the IP address for the product:
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the product and to the network.
2. Turn the product on. Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time,
the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name
for the product.
3. Touch the Network button to display the IP address. For more

information about the network connection, print a network configuration
page.
Install the software:
1. Quit all programs on the computer.

3. When prompted, select Wired Network - Connect the printer to your
network using an Ethernet cable, and then click Next.
4. Select the printer that has the correct IP address from the list of available
printers.
Configure IP network settings overview

This section covers the following topics:
 View or change network settings

 Set or change the product password
 Manually configure the product password
 Configure Link speed and duplex settings
 HP ePrint
View or change network settings

Use the embedded Web server to view or change IP configuration settings.
1. Print a configuration page, and locate the IP address.

o If you are using IPv4, the IP address contains only digits.
It has the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
o If you are using IPv6, the IP address is a hexadecimal

combination of characters and digits.
It has a format similar to: xxxx::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
2. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address (IPv4) into the
address line of a Web browser. For IPv6, use the protocol established by the
Web browser for entering IPv6 addresses.
3. Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. You can change
settings as needed.
Set or change the product password

Use the HP Embedded Web Server to set a password or change an existing password for
a product on a network so unauthorized users cannot change the product settings.
1. Type the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser. Click
the Settings tab, click Security, and then click the Password Settings link.
NOTE: If a password has previously been set, you are prompted to type
the password. Type “admin” for User Name along with the password,
and then click Apply.
2. Type the new password in the Password box and in the Confirm
Password box.
3. At the bottom of the window, click Apply to save the password.
Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP

HP Officejet Pro X451
1. From the Home screen, press the Setup button.

2. Press Network Setup.
3. Press Advanced Setup.
4. Press IPv4.
5. Press Manual.
6. Press IP Address.
7. Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address, and press OK.
Press Yes to confirm.
8. Use the numeric keypad to enter the subnet mask, and press OK.
Press Yes to confirm.
9. Use the numeric keypad to enter the default gateway, and press OK.
Press Yes.to confirm.
1. From the control panel, touch the Wireless button.

2. Touch Advanced Setup.
3. Touch IPv4.
4. Touch Manual IP Address.
5. Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address, and touch OK.
Touch Yes to confirm.
6. Use the numeric keypad to enter the subnet mask, and touch OK.
7. Use the numeric keypad to enter the default gateway, and touch OK.
HP Officejet Pro X476 and HP Officejet Pro X576
1. Touch the Setup button.

2. Scroll to and touch Network Setup.
3. Touch Advanced Setup, and then touch the IPv4 Settings button.
4. Touch the Manual IP Address button.
5. Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address, and touch OK.
6. Use the numeric keypad to enter the subnet mask, and touch OK.
7. Use the numeric keypad to enter the default gateway, and touch OK.
Link speed and duplex settings

NOTE: This information applies only to Ethernet networks. It does not apply to wireless
networks.
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network hub.
For most situations, leave the product in automatic mode. Incorrect changes to the link
speed and duplex settings might prevent the product from communicating with other
network devices. If you need to make changes, use the product control panel.
The setting must match with the network product to which you are connecting (a network
hub, switch, gateway, router, or computer).
NOTE: Making changes to these settings causes the product to turn off and then on. Make
changes only when the product is idle.
To make changes to link speed and duplex settings:
1. From the control panel, press (X451 Series) or touch (X551, X476 and X576
Series) the Setup button.

2. Press or touch Network Setup.
3. Press or touch Advanced Setup.
4. Press or touch Link Speed.
5. Select one of the following options:
Setting Description
The print server automatically configures itself for the

Automatic highest link speed and communication mode allowed on the
network
10 Half 10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation
10 Full 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
100 Full 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
100 Half 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
6. Press or touch the OK button. The product turns off and then on.
HP ePrint
With HP ePrint , you can print anywhere, anytime, from a mobile phone, laptop, or any
other mobile device. HP ePrint works with any email-capable device. If you can email, you
can print to an HP ePrint enabled product. For more details, go to www.hpeprintcenter.com.
NOTE: The product must be connected to a network and have internet access to use HP
ePrint.
HP ePrint is disabled as a default setting in the product.
To enable HP ePrint:
1. Type the product IP address into the address line of a Web browser to open
the HP Embedded Web Server.
2. Click the HP Web Services tab.
3. Select the option to enable Web Services.
Install the product on a wireless network overview (wireless models only)

Before installing the product software, make sure the product is not connected to the
network using an Ethernet cable.
If your wireless router does not support Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), obtain the
wireless router network settings from your system administrator, or complete the
following tasks:
 Obtain the wireless network name or service set identifier (SSID).

 Determine the security password or encryption key for the wireless network.
Connect the product to a wireless network using the Wireless Setup Wizard
NOTE: The wireless setup wizard is the best method for installing the product on a wireless
network.
To install the product on a wireless network if the wireless router does not support
WPS:
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Setup
button.
2. Touch the Network button, and then touch the Wireless Setup
Wizard button.
3. The product scans for available wireless networks and returns a list of
network names (SSIDs). Select the SSID for the wireless router from the list
if it is available. If the SSID for the wireless router is not in the list, touch
the Enter SSID button. When prompted for the type of network security,
select the option that the wireless router uses. A keypad opens on the
control panel display.
4. If the wireless router uses WPA security, type the passphrase on the
keypad.
If the wireless router uses WEP security, type the key on the keypad.
5. Touch the OK button, and wait while the product establishes a connection

with the wireless router. Establishing the wireless connection can take a few
minutes.
Connect the product to a wireless network using WPS

1. From the product control panel, press (X451 Series) or touch (X551 Series)
the Wireless button.
2. Select the Wireless menu button.
3. Press the Wi-Fi Protected Setup button, and then press Continue.
4. Use one of these methods to complete the setup:
o Pushbutton: Select the Push Button option and follow the
instructions on the control panel. Establishing the wireless
connection can take a few minutes.
o PIN: Select the Generate PIN option and follow the instructions
on the control panel. The product generates a unique PIN, which
you must type into the wireless router's setup screen. Establishing
the wireless connection can take a few minutes.
NOTE: If this method is not successful, try using the Wireless Setup
Wizard on the product control panel or use the USB cable connection
method.
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, touch the Setup
button.
2. Touch the Network menu button, and then touch Continue.
3. Use one of these methods to complete the setup:
o Pushbutton: Select the Push Button option and follow the
instructions on the control panel. Establishing the wireless
connection can take a few minutes.
o PIN: Select the Generate PIN option and follow the instructions
on the control panel. The product generates a unique PIN, which
you must type into the wireless router's setup screen. Establishing
the wireless connection can take a few minutes.
NOTE: If this method is not successful, try using the Wireless Setup
Wizard on the product control panel or use the USB cable connection
method.
Connect the product to a wireless network using a USB cable

If your wireless router does not support WiFi-Protected Setup (WPS), use this method to
set up the product on a wireless network. Using a USB cable to transfer settings makes
setting up a wireless connection easier. After the setup is complete, you can disconnect the
USB cable and use the wireless connection.
To connect the product to a wireless network using a USB cable:
1. Insert the software CD into the computer CD tray.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted, select Wireless-
Connect the printer to the wireless network and internet. Connect the
USB cable to the product when prompted.
CAUTION: Do not connect the USB cable until the installation program
prompts you.
3. When the installation is complete, print a configuration page to make sure

that the product has an SSID name.
4. When installation is complete, disconnect the USB cable.
Install the software for a wireless product currently on the network

If the product already has an IP address on a wireless network and you want to
install product software on a computer, complete the following steps:
1. From the product control panel, print a configuration page to obtain the
product IP address.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. When prompted, select Wireless- Connect the printer to your wireless
network and internet, and then click Next.
5. From the list of available printers, select the printer that has the correct IP
address.
Manually connect the product to a wireless network

During the first 120 minutes of product setup, or after resetting the product's network
defaults (and without a network cable attached to the product), the product's wireless radio
will broadcast a wireless setup network for the product.
The name of this network is “HP-Setup-xx-[product name]”.
NOTE: The “xx” in the network is name is the last two characters of the product's MAC
address.
To manually connect the product to a wireless network:
1. From a wireless enabled product, connect to the setup network for the
device.
2. Open a web browser while connected to this setup network, and open the
HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) using the following IP address:
o 192.168.223.1
3. Find the Wireless Setup Wizard in the product's EWS and follow the on
screen instructions to manually connect the product.
NOTE: The product uses Automatic DHCP by default.
Install product software

The In-box CD includes installers for Windows and Mac OS systems. The software installer
installs the discrete (product-specific) HP PCL 6 print driver and optional software on the
host system.
The Windows version of the installer includes an option to enable HP ePrint for networked
products. Macintosh users must enable HP ePrint using the Web Services tab in the EWS.
HP ePrint is not available for USB-connected products.
IMPORTANT! Leave the USB cable disconnected when installing the software on a
Windows computer that will be directly connected to the product. The software installer will
prompt the user to connect the USB cable at the proper time.
Click a link below to view a video of the software-installation process.
 Windows 8
 Directly connect the product to a computer using a USB cable.
 Connect the product to a wired network.
 Mac OS X
 Directly connect the product to a computer using a USB cable.
 Connect the product to a wired network.
Fax setup overview

Fax setup applies only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP models only.
This section covers the following topics:
 Fax software
 DSL, PBX, ISDN, and VoIP setup options
 Install and connect the fax hardware
 Configure fax settings
 Fax Setup Wizard (Windows)
 Fax software
 The PC fax program that came with the product is the only PC fax program that
works with the product. To continue to use a PC fax program previously installed on
the computer, use the modem that is already connected to the computer; it will not
function through the product modem.
 The HP Officejet product is an analog device that is not compatible with all digital
phone environments (unless a digital-to-analog converter is used). HP does not
guarantee that the product will be compatible with digital environments or digital-to-
analog converters.
 HP products are designed specifically for use with traditional analog phone
services. They are not designed to work on DSL, PBX, ISDN lines, or VoIP
services, but they work with the proper setup and equipment.
 NOTE: HP recommends discussing DSL, PBX, ISDN, and VoIP setup options with
the service provider.
DSL, PBX, ISDN, and VoIP setup options

DSL
 DSL uses digital technology over standard copper telephone wires. This
product is not directly compatible with those digital signals. However, if the
configuration is specified during DSL setup, the signal can be separated so
that some of the bandwidth is used to transmit an analog signal (for voice and
fax) while the remaining bandwidth is used to transmit digital data.
 A typical DSL modem uses a filter to separate the higher frequency DSL
modem communication from lower frequency analog phone and fax modem
communication. It is often necessary to use a filter with analog phones and
analog fax products that are connected to a telephone line used by a DSL
modem. The DSL service provider usually provides this filter.
 Contact the DSL provider for more information or for assistance.
 Not all faxes are compatible with DSL services. HP does not guarantee that
the product will be compatible with all DSL service lines or providers.
PBX
 The product is an analog device that is not compatible in all digital phone
environments. Digital-to-analog filters or converters may be needed for faxing
functionality.
 Contact the PBX provider for more information and for assistance.
 HP does not guarantee that the product will be compatible with digital
environments or digital-to-analog converters.
ISDN
 The product is an analog device that is not compatible in all digital phone
environments. Digital-to-analog filters or converters may be needed for faxing
functionality.
 Contact the ISDN provider for more information and for assistance.
 HP does not guarantee that the product will be compatible with ISDN digital
environments or digital-to-analog converters.
VoIP
 Voice over internet protocol (VoIP) services are often not compatible with fax
machines unless the provider explicitly states that it supports fax over IP
services.
 If the product experiences problems getting a fax to work on a VoIP network,
verify that all cables and settings are correct. Decreasing the fax-speed
setting might allow the product to send a fax over a VoIP network.
 If the VoIP provider offers a "Pass through" mode for the connection, that will
offer better fax performance on VoIP. Also if the provider has "comfort noise"
added to the line, fax performance can be enhanced if this feature is not
enabled.
 If faxing problems continue, contact the VoIP provider.
 Install and connect the fax hardware
 Connect the telephone cable to the line port on the product and to the
telephone jack on the wall.
 The product is an analog device. HP recommends using the product on a dedicated
analog telephone line. If you are using a digital environment, such as DSL, PBX,
ISDN, or VoIP, make sure to use the correct filters and configure the digital settings
correctly. For more information, contact your digital service provider.
 NOTE: Some countries/regions might require an adapter to the phone cord that
came with the product.
Configure fax settings

Configure the product fax settings from the control panel or from the HP Embedded Web
Server.
In the United States and many other countries/regions, setting the time, date, and other fax
header information is a legal requirement.
To set the fax time, date, and header from the control panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch the Setup button.
2. Touch the Device Setup menu.
3. Touch the Preferences menu.
4. Scroll to and touch the Date and Time button.
5. Select the 12-hour clock or 24-hour clock.
6. Use the keypad to enter the current time, and then touch the OK button.
7. Select the date format.
8. Use the keypad to enter the current date, and then touch the OK button.
9. From the Fax Setup menu, touch the Basic Fax Setup menu, and then
touch the Fax Header menu.
10. Use the keypad to enter a name and fax's telephone number when
prompted, and then touch the OK button. The maximum number of
characters for the fax number is 20.
11. Use the keypad to enter header identifying information, and then touch
the OK button. The maximum number of characters for the fax header is 25.
NOTE: When using the control panel to enter text, or to enter a name for a one-touch key,
speed-dial entry, or group-dial entry, touch the 123 button to open a keypad that contains
special characters.
Use the HP Fax Setup Wizard (Windows)

To use the HP Fax Setup Wizard:
1. On the computer, click Start, and then click Programs.

2. Click HP, click the name of the product, and then click on the printer.
3. Choose the Fax Setup Wizard from the Fax section of the HP Printer
Assistant.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the
fax settings.
NOTE: The fax setup process can be completed at any time by using the HP Fax Setup
Wizard.
Use and maintain

 Identify and use the features of the control panel.

 Understand the paper handling and ink cartridge features and options.
 Describe the product features.
 Describe the Customer Self-Repair (CSR) parts policy and replace CSR parts
and supplies.
 Identify maintenance and troubleshooting steps for print jams.
Control panel menus overview

Officejet Pro X451 models have monochrome graphic displays. The Officejet Pro x551 and
Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series have color graphic touchscreen displays. All
Officejet Pro X Series control panels tilt so they can be easily viewed.
The touchscreen is referred to as the control panel in the product documentation.
The touchscreen display is built into a control-panel assembly and is not replaceable.
Replace the control-panel assembly if the display needs to be replaced.
Select a product model for a description of the control panel menu:
 Officejet Pro X451dn and X451dw control panel menus

 Officejet Pro X551dw control panel menus
 Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP control panel menus
Officejet Pro X451dn and X451dw control panel menus overview

The control panel Home screen for the Officejet Pro x451 has the following buttons:
 Setup
 Job Status
 Ink Information
Setup menu overview

To access the Setup menu, press the Setup button from the control panel.
The following submenus are available:
 Network menu
 HP Web Services menu
 Device Setup menu
 Tools menu
 Print Reports menu
Network menu
 Wireless
Available on wireless products only.

Enable or disable the wireless network feature.
You can also access this menu by touching the Wireless button on the
control panel.
 Wireless Direct

Configure the Wireless Direct settings.
Options are: On, On With Security, and Off.
 WiFi Protected Setup

If the wireless router supports WPS, use this method to set up the product on
a wireless network
This is the simplest method.
 View Network Summary
Print a summary of the network settings.

Select from View Wired and View Wireless.
 Print Wireless Test Report

Print a wireless test report.
 Print Network Configuration Page
Print a report of the network configuration settings.
 Advanced Setup
o Link Speed: Set the link speed. After setting the link speed, the
product automatically restarts. The factory default link speed setting
is Automatic.
o IP Settings: Set whether the product's IP setting are configured

automatically with DHCP or set manually. The factory default
setting is Automatic (DHCP).
o IPv6: Enable or disable the IPv6 protocol on the product. The

factory default setting is On.
o Hostname: Use this setting the change how the product is

identified on the network.
o Legacy Default IP: Enable or disable the Legacy Default IP.
NOTE: Wireless menu options are only available on products that

support wireless connectivity.
 Restore Network Defaults
Resets all network configurations to the factory defaults.
HP Web Services menu

The HP Web Services menu is available on Officejet Pro X451dw models only.
HP Web Services prints documents using HP ePrint and the Apps menu.
Select Yes to enable HP Web services. Select No to disable HP Web services.
Device Setup menu
 Preferences
o Time/Date: Set the time format, current time, date format, and
current date for the product:
o Language: Set the language in which the control panel displays

messages and product reports.
o Country/Region: Select from a list of available countries/regions.
o Screen Brightness: Adjust the sliding bar to control the screen

brightness on the control panel.
o Sound Effects Volume: Adjust the product's sound effect level.

The factory default setting is Soft.
o Faster Browsing: Set the browsing speed.
 Default Tray
Set the default tray to print from.

The factory default setting is Tray 2.
 Default Paper in Tray
Set a default paper type and size for each Tray.
 Tray Lock
Tray Lock is a feature that “locks" a tray so that the only time the printer will
draw from that tray is when it is specifically requested. This is useful when
putting special paper in a tray, such as letterhead. If using “Automatically
Select" for the paper source and Tray 1 is locked, the printer will only draw
from the remaining trays, either Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, if it is installed.
Printing can still be done from the locked tray, but the source must be
specified. Tray 1 lock may be overridden under certain conditions.
The factory default setting is None.
 Duplex
Select whether to turn duplexing On or Off.

If duplexing is On, select the long edge or short edge of the paper for binding.
 Ink Low Warning Level
Determines when the Low Ink warning message appears on the control panel.
Choose Custom to select an ink level from 1–99 percent.
 Power Handling
o Standby: Determines when to put the product in Standby mode.

The factory default setting is 10 minutes.
o Sleep after Standby: Determines when to put the product to sleep

after it has been put into Standby mode. The factory default setting
is 2 hours.
o Auto Power Off: Available on the HP Officejet Pro X451 only. Sets
the product to power down after a specified amount of time. The
factory default is Never.
o Schedule On/Off: Schedules a time to automatically turn the

product on or off.
 Print Settings
o Personality: Set the Printer language. By default, the product

automatically selects the language.
o Copies: Set the number of copies (0–99) to make when

the Copy button is touched. The default value is 1.
o Quality: Set the default print quality. Options are General Office,
Professional, and Presentation. The factory default setting
is Professional.
o PCL Configuration: Set the text attributes for the printer control
language.
Print Postscript error: Set the product to print any postscript

errors that occur.
 NOTE: For HP Officejet Pro X451 Series products, font pitch and font
point size settings can not be made at the product control panel.
Changes to these setting must be made using the EWS.
Tools menu
Use the Tools menu to improve the print quality and view estimated ink levels.
The following submenu items are available:
 Display Estimated Ink Levels: Display a graph of ink consumption for each
cartridge.
 Clean Printhead: Use to clean, adjust, and align the printheads. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
 Cartridge Chip Information: The cartridge chip stores anonymous
information about the usage of the product.
 Control Panel Lock: Use to lock the product’s control panel and prevent
unauthorized use of the product.
 Clean Ink Smear: Use to solve print quality problems caused by ink smearing
on printed pages.
 Restore Factory Defaults: Returns all settings to the factory default values.
Print Reports menu

Use the Print Reports menu to print reports that provide information about the product.
 Printer Status Report: Prints current product information, cartridge status,

and other product information.
 Print Quality Report: Prints a quality test to diagnose minor print issues.
 Usage Page: Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the
product; lists whether they were monochrome or color, simplex or duplex, and
reports the page count. This report is useful for reconciling contractual billing
statements.
 Network Configuration Page: Prints information about the product's wired or
wireless network connection.
 Event Log: Prints a list of errors and intermittent failures designed to help
troubleshoot problems.
 PCL Font List: Prints a list of all the PCL fonts that are installed.
 PCL6 Font List: Prints a list of all the PCL6 fonts that are installed.
 PS Font List: Prints a list of all the PS fonts that are installed.
Job Status menu overview

To access the Job Status menu, press the Job Status button from the Home screen on the
control panel. The Job Status menu is available on Officejet Pro X451 models only.
 Job Status
 Estimated Ink Levels
 Network Summary
 Job Status
 View information on currently processing jobs on the product.
 Estimated Ink Levels

 View a graphic representation of the ink level for all ink cartridges.
Network Summary
 Wired—View a summary of the product's wired network settings; IP address,

hostname, and Mac address.
 Wireless—View a summary of the product's wireless network settings; IP
address, hostname, and Mac address.
Ink Information menu overview

To access the Ink Information menu, press the Ink Information button from the Home
screen on the control panel.
 Estimated levels
 Cartridge Info
 Print Report
 Estimated levels
 View a graphic representation of the ink level for all ink cartridges.
 Cartridge Info
 Select an ink cartridge to view a graphic representation of the ink level for an
individual cartridge.
 Print Report
 Print the Printer Status Report.
Officejet Pro X551dw control panel menus overview

The control panel Home screen for the Officejet Pro x551 has the following buttons:
 Apps
 Plug and Print
 Setup
 Apps menu
 Use the Apps menu to enable Web Services and use HP ePrint and print Apps.
 To access the Apps menu touch the Apps button on the Home page of the
control panel.
 Plug and Print menu

 Use the Plug and Print menu to print directly from a USB Flash or Hard Drive
device.
 To access the Plug and Print menu, touch the Plug and Print button on the
Home page of the control panel.
Setup menu overview
To access the Setup menu, touch the Setup button from the control panel Home
screen.
 Network menu
 Tools menu
Network menu
 Wireless
Enable or disable the wireless network feature. You can also access this
menu by touching the Wireless button on the control panel.
 Wireless Direct
 Wireless Setup Wizard
Guides you through the steps to set up the product on a wireless network.
If the wireless router supports WPS, use this method to set up the product on
a wireless network.
This is the simplest method.
Print a summary of the network settings.
Print a wireless test report.
Print a report of the network configuration settings.
 Advanced Setup
o Link Speed: Set the link speed. After setting the link speed, the
product automatically restarts. The factory default link speed setting
is Automatic.

o IPv6: Enable or disable the IPv6 protocol on the product. The

factory default setting is On.
o Hostname: Use this setting the change how the product is
identified on the network.
o Legacy Default IP: Enable or disable the Legacy Default IP.
 Restore Network Defaults: Resets all network configurations to the factory

defaults.
NOTE: Wireless menu options are only available on products that support wireless
connectivity.
Device Setup menu
 Preferences
o Time/Date: Set the time format, current time, date format, and
current date for the product:
o Language: Set the language in which the control panel displays

o Country/Region: Select from a list of available countries/regions.


o Faster Browsing: Set the browsing speed.
 Default Tray
Set the default tray to print from.

The factory default setting is Tray 2
 Default Paper in Tray
Set a default paper type and size for each Tray.
 Tray Lock
 Duplex
Select whether to turn duplexing On or Off.

If duplexing is On, select the long edge or short edge of the paper for binding.
Choose Custom to select an ink level from 1-99 percent.
 Power Handling


is 2 hours.

product on or off.
 Print Settings
o Personality: Set the Printer language. By default, the product

o Copies: Set the number of copies (0–99) to make when

o Quality: Set the default print quality. Options are General

Office, Professional, and Presentation. The factory default
setting is Professional.
o PCL Configuration: Set the text attributes for the printer control
language.
o Print Postscript error: Set the product to print any postscript

errors that occur.
Tools menu
cartridge.
on printed pages.
Print Reports menu


 Print Quality Report: Prints a quality test to help diagnose minor print issues.
statements.
Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series control panel menus overview
Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to scroll across the Home screen for
more buttons.
The control panel Home screen for Officejet Pro X476 and X576 models has the
following buttons:
 Copy
 Fax
 Scan
 Apps
 Plug and Print
 Setup
Copy menu
To access the Copy menu, touch the Copy button on the Home screen of the control
panel.
NOTE: Settings changed with this menu expire 2 minutes after the last copy completes.
 Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies.
 Two-Sided
Specifies the duplex setting for copies.

Select from the available options.
The factory default setting is 1-Sided to 1-Sided Copy.
 Lighter/Darker
Specifies how light or dark to make the copy.
 Start
Select Black for a black and white copy.

Select Color for a color copy.
 Preview
Provides an on-screen preview of what is being copied.
 Settings
o HP Copy Fix: Enhances printouts by removing dark edges and

fixing page skew problems for black and white copies. The factory
default setting is Off.
o ID Copy: Copies both sides of identification cards, or small-size

documents, onto the same side of one sheet of paper. The factory
default setting is Off.
o Resize: Resizes the copy. Select from the available options. The
factory default setting is Actual.
o Quality: Sets the copy quality. The factory default setting

is Professional.
o Collate: Specifies whether to collate copy jobs. The factory default

setting is Off
o Crop: Copies a specific portion of the page.

o Copy Preview: Provides an on-screen preview of what is being
copied.
o Tray Selection: Specifies which tray, and the paper size and type,
to use for copies. The factory default setting is Tray 2.
o Enhancements: Enhances specific aspects of the copy. Options

are: Text, Photo, Mixed, or None. The factory default setting
is Mixed.
o Set as New Defaults: Saves the changes to the menu as the new
defaults.
 Fax menu overview
 To access the Fax menu, touch the Fax button on the Home screen of the
Control Panel.
 The Fax menu has a Settings button and a Fax Methods menu.
Fax settings
 Resolution
Sets the resolution for sent documents.

Select from the available options. Options are: Standard, Fine, Very Fine,
and Photo. The factory default setting is Fine.
Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more
detail.
Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but
the file size is smaller.
 Lighter/Darker
Sets the brightness level of the fax.
 Fax Send Original
Sets how faxes are sent on paper.

Options are: 1-Sided Original, 2-Sided Original, and 2-Sided Original with
Cover Page.
 Set as New Defaults:
Saves any adjusted settings as the new default.
Fax Methods
 Scan and Fax

Allows the product to scan the entire document before dialing.
Prints an image of the first page faxed on the confirmation page.
 Broadcast Fax
Used to send a fax to a distribution list.

A broadcast list must be created before sending a broadcast fax.
 Send Fax Later
Allows a fax to be sent at a later time and date.
 Poll to Receive
Allows the product to send a fax from another machine remotely.
Scan menu overview
To access the Scan menu, touch the Scan button on the Home screen of the control
panel.
The following scanning methods are available:
 Computer
Scans to a computer that is on the same network or connected to the product.
 Memory Device
Scans to a USB drive connected to the product.
 Network Folder
Scans to a folder or directory on the network.
 Email
Sends the scan to a specified email address.
Scan settings
 Document Type
Specifies the output image document type.

Select from the available options.
 Resolution
Specifies the resolution to use for the scanned image.

Scan quality increases with higher resolution, but the file size also increases.
The factory default setting is 600 dpi for scanning from the glass and 300 dpi
for scanning from the document feeder.
 Filename
Provides a way to set a standard name prefix for scan job files.
 Settings
Select from the following settings:
o Original: Specifies the number of sides of the original document to

scan. The factory default setting is 1-Sided Original
o Lighter/Darker: Allows the scan to be darkened or lightened based

on the slider selection.
o Paper Size: Specifies the size of the page to use for the scanned
file. The default page size varies depending on the country/region.
o Set as New Defaults: Saves changes to the menu as the new

defaults
NOTE: Scan settings are made after selecting the scanning method.
Apps menu
To access the Apps menu, touch the Apps button on the Home screen of the control
panel.
Use the Apps menu to enable Web Services on the product and use HP ePrint and print
Apps.
Plug and Print menu
To access the Plug and Print menu, press the right arrow button on the control panel
to scroll to the right of the Home screen and touch the Plug and Print button.
Use the Apps menu to enable Web Services on the product and use HP ePrint and print
Apps.
Setup menu overview
To access the Setup menu, press the right arrow button on the control panel to scroll
to the right of the Home screen and touch the Setup button.

 Fax Setup menu
 Network Setup menu
 HP Digital Solutions Setup menu
 Tools menu
Fax Setup menu overview

The following Fax Setup menu items are available:

 Speed Dial Setup
 Basic Fax Setup
 Advanced Fax Setup
 Fax Tools
 Fax Reports

 Use to configure the fax settings. Follow the on-screen prompts.
 Speed-Dial Setup
 Configures stored individual and group contact fax information.
Basic Fax Setup

The following Basic Fax Setup submenus are available:
 Fax Header
Sets the identifying information to send to the receiving product.
 Two-Sided Fax Print
Use to print 2-Sided incoming faxes. The default is 1-Sided.
 Auto Answer
Sets whether to receive faxes automatically (On) or manually (Off).
 Fax Paper Size
Sets the paper size for outgoing faxes.
 Dial Type
Sets the dial type to Tone or Pulse dialing. The factory default setting is Tone
Dialing.
 Dial Prefix
Use to Specify a prefix number that must be dialed when sending faxes from
the product.
This number is automatically included every time you send a fax.
 Block Junk Faxes
When the product receives a call from a junk fax number, it deletes the
incoming fax and logs the junk fax in the activity log.
The junk fax list can contain up to 100 numbers.
Print the Junk Fax List, Caller ID History, and Fax Log by using Print Reports.
NOTE: The Block Junk Faxes feature requires Caller ID services with the
telephone company.
 HP Digital Fax
Set up HP Digital Fax using the software that came with the product and a
computer that is connected to the same network as the product.
Advanced Fax Setup

The following Advanced Fax Setup submenus are available:
 Distinctive Ring
If you have distinctive ring phone service, use this item to configure how the
product responds to incoming calls.
o All Rings: The product answers all calls that come through the
telephone line.
o Single: The product answers calls that produce a single ring.
o Double: The product answers calls that produce a double-ring

pattern.
o Triple: The product answers calls that produce a triple ring.
o Double and Triple: The product answers calls that produce a

double-ring or triple-ring pattern.
 Redial Setup
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial if the line is busy, there is
no answer, or if there is a communication error.
 Fax Stamping
Prints the date, time, sender’s phone number, and page number on each
page of incoming faxes.
The factory default setting is Off.
 Fax Confirmation
Prints a thumbnail image of the fax on the Fax Confirmation page.

The factory default setting is On.
 Automatic Reduction
If the fit-to-page option is On, the product automatically reduces long faxes up
to 75% to fit on the default paper size (for example, the fax is reduced from
legal to letter size).
If the fit-to-page option is Off, long faxes print at full size on multiple pages.
The factory-set default for incoming fax auto reduction is On.
When the stamp-received faxes option On, Automatic Reduction prevents
the page-stamp from forcing a fax onto two pages.
 Backup Fax Reception
Stores an electronic backup of received faxes.

Options are: On, Off, and On Error Only.
 Error Correction Mode
Allows the sending device to re-transmit data if it detects an error signal.

 Confirm Fax Number
Sets whether the product confirms a fax number before sending.

 Fax Speed
Sets the fax communication speed.

Options are: Fast (33600 bps), Medium (14400 bps), and Slow (9600 bps).
The factory default setting is Fast.
 Fax Forwarding
Forwards the fax to another fax machine.

Select the print and forward option to print a hard copy.
 Fax Report
Prints a fax information page based on the selected settings.
 Restore Fax Defaults
Resets all fax configurations to the factory default settings.

Fax Tools
 Reprint Faxes in Memory
The product reprints all stored faxes.
 Run Fax Test
Performs a fax test to verify that the phone cord is plugged in the correct
outlet and that there is a signal on the phone line.
A fax test report is printed indicating the results.
 Clear Fax Log
Clears all faxes in memory.
Fax Reports
 Last Transaction
Prints a detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.
 Fax Log
Prints the last 30 entries in the fax log.
 Speed-Dial List
Prints a list of the speed dials that have been set up for this product.
The speed-dial list holds up to 99 numbers.
 Caller ID Report
Prints a list of all incoming fax phone numbers up to the maximum of 30

numbers.
 Junk Fax Report
Prints a list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this
product.
Network Setup menu

NOTE: Wireless menu options are only available on products that support wireless
connectivity.
 Wireless
Enable or disable the wireless network feature.
You can also access this menu by touching the Wireless button on the
control panel.
 Wireless Direct
 Wireless Setup Wizard
Guides you through the steps to set up the product on a wireless network.
If your wireless router supports WPS, use this method to set up the product
on a wireless network.
This is the simplest method to set up a wireless network.
Prints a summary of you network settings.
Prints a wireless test report.
Prints a report of the network configuration settings.
 Advanced Setup
o Link Speed: Sets the link speed. After setting the link speed, the
product automatically restarts. The factory default setting
is Automatic.

o IPv6: Use to enable or disable the IPv6 protocol on the product.

o Hostname: Use this setting to change how the product is identified

on the network.
o Legacy Default IP: Use to enable or disable the Legacy Default IP.
 Restore Network Defaults
Resets all network configurations to the factory defaults.
HP Digital Solutions Setup
 Digital Solution Setup Wizard
Guides you through the steps to set up HP Digital Solutions.
Device Setup menu

 Preferences
o Time/Date: Sets the time format, current time, date format, and
current date for the product.
o Language:Sets the language in which the control panel displays

o Country/Region: Use to select the country/region.
o Keyboard: Use to select which keyboard layout to use on the

control panel. The factory default setting is QWERTY.


o Faster Browsing: Sets the browsing speed to go faster than the

default.
 Paper Handling
o Default Tray: Sets the default tray to print from. The factory default
setting is Tray 2.
o Tray Selection: Sets the default tray for copying, for plug and print
printing, and fax printing.
o Paper Selection: Sets a default media size and type for each tray.
 Tray Lock
Choose Custom to select an ink level from 1-99 percent.
 Power Handling


is 2 hours after standby.

product on or off.
 Print Settings
o Personality: Sets the Printer language. By default, the product

o Copies: Sets the number of copies (0–99) to make when

o Quality: Sets the default print quality. The factory default setting
is Professional.
o Duplex: Sets the product's auto-duplexing feature On or Off.
o PCL Configuration:Set the text attributes for the printer control

language.
o Print Postscript error: Set the product to print any postscript

errors that occur.
Tools menu
cartridge.
on printed pages.
Print Reports menu


 Print Quality Report: Prints a quality test that will help you diagnose minor
print issues.
statements.
 Fax Reports: Provides a list of report options to help you manage the
product’s fax features.
Paper handling overview

HP Officejet inks for business are specifically developed for use with HP printheads.
Unique ink formulations help extend the life of the printheads and enhance reliability. When
used with ColorLok® paper, these inks provide laser-like color output that dries quickly and
is ready for distribution.
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media. Paper or print media that
does not meet the following guidelines might cause poor print quality, increased jams, and
premature wear on the product.
It is possible for paper to meet all of these guidelines and still not produce satisfactory
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or
humidity levels, or other variables over which HP has no control.
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet HP specifications might cause
problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the HP warranty or
service agreements.
For best results:
 Use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for inkjet printers or
multiuse.
 Use paper or print media made for inkjet printers.
 Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of
media because HP cannot control their quality.
NOTE: Based on HP internal testing using a range of plain papers, HP highly recommends

using papers with the ColorLok® logo for this product. For details go to
www.hp.com/go/printpermanence.
Paper-handling guidelines
Use the following guidelines when using special paper or print media. Set the paper type
and size in the printer driver to obtain the best results.
Media Do Do not
 Do not use envelopes that

are wrinkled, nicked,
 Store envelopes flat.
stuck together, or
 Use envelopes where
otherwise damaged.
Envelopes the seam extends all
 Do not use envelopes that
the way to the corner
have clasps, snaps,
of the envelope.
windows, or coated
linings
 Use only labels that

have no exposed  Do not use labels that have
backing between wrinkles or bubbles, or
them. are damaged.
Labels
 Use labels that lie flat.  Do not print partial sheets
 Use only full sheets of of labels.
labels.
Letterhead  Use only letterhead or

 Do not use raised or
or forms approved for
metallic letterhead.
preprinted use in inkjet printers.
forms
Heavy  Use only heavy paper  Do not use paper that is

paper that is approved for heavier than the
use in inkjet printers recommended media
and meets the weight specification for this
Media Do Do not
product unless it is HP
specifications for paper that has been
this product approved for use in this
product.
 Use onlyglossy or
 Do not use glossy or coated
Glossy or coated paper that is
paper designed for use
coated approved for use in
in laser products.
paper inkjet printers.
Set the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows
To set the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows:
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.
5. Select a paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.
6. Click the OK button.
Paper trays overview

Built-in input trays
All models and bundles include:
 Tray 1: 50-sheet capacity multipurpose tray that folds down on the left side of
the product
accessible from the front of the product.
NOTE: Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental
conditions.
Additional or optional input trays
 Tray 3: An optional 500-sheet capacity accessory tray that can be added to

all models and bundles.
NOTE: Tray 3 does not support envelope printing
Configure the paper trays

By default, the product pulls paper from Tray 2. If Tray 2 is empty, the product pulls paper
from Tray 1, or Tray 3 if it is installed. Configuring a tray on this product changes the speed
settings to obtain the best print quality for the type of paper. If using special paper for all or
most print jobs on the product, change the default tray setting on the product
The following table lists ways to use the tray settings:
Paper use Configure the Print

product
Load Tray 1 and

Load paper in Tray
one other tray with
1. No configuration
the same paper, and
is needed, if the From the software program, print the
have the product
default settings for job.
pick paper from one
type and size have
tray if the other one
not been changed.
is empty.
From the software program print

Occasionally use dialog, choose the paper type that
special paper, such matches the special paper loaded in
as heavy paper or Load special paper the tray before sending the print job.
letterhead, from a in Tray 1. Select Tray 1 as the Paper Source
tray that usually from the Paper/Quality tab
contains plain paper. (Windows) or Paper Feed menu
(Mac).
From the software program print

dialog, choose the paper type that
Frequently use
Load special paper matches the special paper loaded in
special paper, such
in Tray 1, and the tray before sending the print job.
as heavy paper or
configure the tray Select Tray 1 as the Paper Source
letterhead, from one
for the paper type. from the Paper/Quality tab
tray.
(Windows) or Paper Feed menu
(Mac).
To configure a paper tray from the control panel:
1. Make sure the product is On.
2. Select the Setup button.

3. press or touch Paper Handling.
4. press or touch Paper Selection.
5. Select the tray that you want to configure.
6. Select a Default Media Size and a Default Media Type.
7. Press OK or click Apply.
To configure paper trays from the EWS:
1. Make sure the product is On.

2. Click the Settings tab
3. Click Paper Settings in the left panel.
4. Select a Default Media Size and a Default Media Type for each tray.
5. Press OK or click Apply.
Document feeder (HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series only)

The document feeder holds up to 50 sheets of paper.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, do not load an original document that
contains correction tape, correction fluid, paper clips, or staples. Also, do not load
photographs, small original, or fragile originals into the document feeder.
To load the document feeder:
1. Insert the originals into the document feeder face-up.
Adjust the guides until they are snug against the paper.
Managing ink cartridges

Correctly using, storing, and monitoring the ink cartridge can help ensure high-quality print
output.
Do not remove the ink cartridge from its package until ready for use.
Do not touch the metal connector and ink nozzle. Fingerprints may cause supply error
messages.
Dust may cause supply error messages; do not leave ink cartridges outside the product for
prolonged periods of time.
HP anticounterfeit website
HP does not recommend the use of non-HP ink cartridges, either new or remanufactured.
Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and
service agreements.
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the
control-panel message says the cartridge is used or counterfeit. HP will help to take steps
to resolve the problem.
The ink cartridge might not be a genuine HP ink cartridge if you notice the following:
 The supplies status page indicates that a used or counterfeit supply is

installed.
 A high number of problems with the ink cartridge.
 The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging
differs from HP packaging).
Printing when an ink cartridge is at estimated end of life

The following supply-related notifications are communicated on the product control
panel:
 A Low message appears when an ink cartridge is nearing the estimated end

of its useful life. Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement
supply on hand.
 A Very Low message appears when the ink cartridge is near its estimated
end of useful life. Have a replacement ink cartridge on hand.
 A Out of Ink message appears when the ink cartridge is empty.
Use the following strategies for continued printing when an ink cartridge is near the
estimated end of life:
 Select the Continue setting
Use the Continue setting to print beyond Very Low without replacing the

cartridge.
The product will shut down before any print problems occur.
 Specify a custom Low Ink Warning Level.
Select Custom from the Low Ink Warning Level menu on the control panel

to set a custom ink level.
The default settings can be enabled or disabled at any time.
Default settings are enabled when you install a new ink cartridge.
 Print in General Office mode.
General Office print mode uses less ink, which can extend the life of the
cartridge.
To print in General Office mode, select General Office from the Print
Quality menu of the software program.
Color overview
The following topics are covered in this section:
 HP EasyColor
 How to manually adjust the color
 How to match colors to the computer screen
HP EasyColor
 HP PCL 6 printer driver for Windows

The HP EasyColor technology automatically improves mixed-content
documents that are printed from Microsoft Office programs. This technology
scans documents and automatically adjusts photographic images in .JPEG
or .PNG format. HP EasyColor technology enhances the entire image at one
time, rather than dividing it into several pieces, which results in improved color
consistency, sharper details, and faster printing.
 HP Postscript printer driver for Mac
The HP EasyColor technology scans all documents and automatically

adjusts all photographic images with the same improved photographic results.
In the following example, the images on the left were created without using
the HP EasyColor option. The images on the right show the enhancements that result from
using the HP EasyColor option.
The HP EasyColor option is enabled by default in both the HP PCL 6 printer driver and the
HP Mac Postscript printer driver, so no manual color adjustments are needed. To disable
the option to manually adjust the color settings, open the Color tab in the Windows driver
or the Color Options tab in the Mac driver, and then click the HP EasyColor check box to
clear it.
Adjusting the Color overview

Manually adjust the color settings on the Color tab (Windows) or Color Options tab (Mac)
in the printer driver.
Use this option for the following:
 Change the color theme for a print job

 Manually change the Ink settings
 Print in grayscale
Change the color theme for a print job

The following color theme options are available:
 Default (sRGB)
Sets the product to print RGB data in raw device mode.

When using this theme, manage color in the software program or in the
operating system for correct rendering.
 Vivid
The product increases the color saturation in the midtones.

Use this theme when printing business graphics.
 Photo
The product interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph using a

digital mini lab.
The product renders deeper, more saturated colors differently than with the
Default (sRBG) theme.
Use this theme when printing photos.
 Photo (Adobe RGB 1998)
Use this theme with printing digital photos that use the AdobeRGB color
space rather than sRGB.
Turn off color management in the software program when using this theme.
 None
No color theme is used.

To change the color theme for a print job:

2. Click Properties or Preferences (Windows).
3. Click the Color tab (Windows) or Color Options tab (Mac).
4. Clear the HP EasyColor check box.
5. Select a color theme from the Color Themes (Windows) or RGB
Color (Mac) drop-down list.
Manually change the ink settings

To manually change the Ink settings:

5. Click the Ink Settings button (Windows) or expand the Advanced menu
(Mac), and then use the slider adjust Dry Time, Saturation, and Blank Ink
Spread.
6. Click OK to save the adjustments and close the window, or click Reset to
return the settings to the factory defaults (Windows).
NOTE: Changing color settings manually can impact output. HP recommends that only
color graphics experts change these settings.
Print in grayscale
To print in grayscale:

5. Click the Print in Grayscale option (Windows) or Print Color as
Gray (Mac) to print a color document in black and shades of gray. Use this
option to print color documents for photocopying or faxing. Use this option to
print draft copies or to save color cartridge life.
6. Click OK (Windows). Reset to return the settings to the factory defaults
(Windows).
Matching colors to the computer screen

For most users, the best method for matching colors is to print sRGB colors.
The process of matching printer output color to your computer screen is complex, because
printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display
colors by using light pixels that use an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers
print colors by using a CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) process.
The following factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on
your monitor:
 Print media
 Printer ink
 Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology, for example)
 Overhead lighting
 Personal differences in perception of color
 Software programs
 Printer drivers
 Computer operating systems
 Monitors
 Video cards and drivers
 Operating environment (humidity, for example)
Print overview
The products use typical print drivers for both Windows and Mac OS.
Windows users can use either the discrete (product specific) print driver or the
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD). The overall operation and functionality of the discrete
driver and the UPD are very similar.
Select from the following operating systems:
 Windows
 Mac OS
Print functions (Windows) overview

This section covers the following Windows print functions:
 Cancel a print job

 Change the paper size and type
 Print on special paper or labels
 Print the first or last page on different paper
 Scale a document to fit page size
 Add a watermark
 Create a booklet
Cancel a print job in Windows

To cancel a print job in Windows:
 Cancel a print job from the control panel.
If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by pressing the Cancel

button on the product control panel to clear the job that the product is
currently processing.
If more than one process is running, pressing the Cancel button clears

the process that currently appears on the product control panel.
NOTE: On HP Officejet Pro X451 Series products, print jobs can also be
canceled from the Job Status menu.
 Cancel a print job from a software program.
Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen allowing you to
cancel the print job.
 Cancel a print job from Windows print queue.
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler,

use one of the following procedures to delete the job:
o Windows XP, Server 2003, or Server 2008:
o Click Start.
o Click Settings.
o Click Printers and Faxes.
o Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-

click the print job that you want to cancel.
o Click Cancel.
o Windows Vista:
o Click Start.
o Click Control Panel.
o Under Hardware and Sound, click Printer.
o Double-click the product icon to open the window, right

o Click Cancel.
o Windows 7:
o Click Start.
o Click Devices and Printers.
o Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-

o Click Cancel.
Change the page size and type with Windows

To select a standard page size:

4. Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.
To create a custom page size:

4. Click the Custom button.
5. Type a name for the custom size and specify the dimensions.
o The width is the short edge of the paper.
o The length is the long edge of the paper.
6. Click the OK button, and then click the OK button on the Paper/Quality tab
The custom page size will appear in the list of paper sizes the next time you
open the printer driver.
NOTE: Always load paper into the trays short edge first.
To select a paper type:

4. From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper, and then
click the paper type that you are using.
Print on special paper or labels

To print on special paper or labels:

6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
NOTE: Labels are in the list of Other options.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click
the OK button.
Print the first or last page on different paper

To print the first or last page on different paper:

4. In the Special pages area, click the Print pages on different paper option,

and then click the Settings button.
5. In the Pages in document area, select either the First or Last option.

6. Select the correct options from the Paper source and Paper type drop-
down lists. Click the Add button.
7. If you are printing both the first and last pages on different paper, repeat
steps 5 and 6, selecting the options for the other page.
Scale a document to fit page size

To scale a document to fit page size:

3. Click the Effects tab.
Select the Print document on option, and then select a size from the drop-down list.
Add a watermark
To add a watermark:

3. Click the Effects tab.
4. Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.
Or, to add a new watermark to the list, click the Edit button. Specify the
settings for the watermark, and then click the OK button.
5. To print the watermark on the first page only, select the First page
only check box. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.
Create a booklet
To create a booklet:

3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select the Print on both sides check box.
In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click the Left binding or Right binding option.
The Pages per sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. Print settings
(windows) overview
The methods to open the print dialog from software programs can vary. Some software
programs do not have a File menu. See the documentation for your software program to
learn how to open the print dialog.
 Save custom print settings for reuse

 Improve Print quality
 Duplex printing
 Print multiple pages
 Change page orientation
 Set advanced color options
Use a printing shortcut with Windows

To use a print shortcut with Windows:

3. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
4. Select one of the shortcuts, and then click the OK button.
NOTE: When you select a shortcut, the corresponding settings change

on the other tabs in the printer driver.
Create printing shortcuts with Windows
To create printing shortcuts with Windows:

3. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
4. Select an existing shortcut as a base.
NOTE: Always select a shortcut before adjusting any of the settings

on the right side of the screen. If you adjust the settings and then
select a shortcut, all your adjustments are lost.
5. Select the print options for the new shortcut.
6. Click the Save As button.
Type a name for the shortcut, and click the OK button.
rinting
To specify duplex printing:

2. Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button
Select the Print on both sides check box. Click the OK button to print the job. Print
multiple pages per sheet

To print multiple pages per sheet:

4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-
down list.
Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options.
Select a page orientation

To specify the page orientation:

4. In the Orientation area, select the Portrait or Landscape option.
To print the page image upside down, select the Rotate by 180

degrees option.
Print functions in Mac OS X overview
 Cancel a print job

 Change the paper size and type
 Resize documents or print on a custom paper size
 Add a watermark
Cancel a print job in Mac OS
 Cancel a print job from the control panel
If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by touching the Printing display
near the bottom of the product control panel, and then touch the Cancel
button that becomes available on the right-side of the control panel.
Canceling a job clears the job the product is currently processing. If more than
one process is running, repeat step one to cancel the other jobs.
 Cancel a print job from the software
Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you
to cancel the print job.
 Cancel a print job from the print queue
Open the print queue by double-clicking the product icon in the dock.
Highlight the print job, and then click Delete.
Change the paper size and type in Mac OS

To change the paper size and type in Mac OS:
1. On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.

2. Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list.
3. Open the Paper/Quality panel.
4. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size

You can resize a document or print on a custom paper size with Mac OS 10.6 and later
using either of these methods:
1. On the File menu, click the Print option.

2. Select the product, and then select the correct settings for the Paper
Size and Orientation options.
OR

2. Open the Paper Handling menu.
3. In the Destination Paper Size area, click the Scale to fit paper size box,
and then select the size from the drop-down list.
Add a watermark
To add a watermark in Mac OS:
2. Open the Watermarks menu.
3. Check the Watermark box to print a semi-transparent message.
4. From the Watermarks menu, select whether to print the watermark on all
pages or on the first page only.
5. From the Text menu, select one of the standard messages, or select
the Custom option and type a new message in the box
6. Select options for the remaining settings.
PrintSettings (Mac) overview

 Create and use printing presets

 Print a cover page
 Print multiple pages on one sheet
Create a printing preset

To save the current printer driver settings for reuse:

2. Select the product from the printer list.
3. Select the print settings that you want to save for reuse.
4. In the Presets menu, click the Save As... option, and type a name for the
preset.
Use printing presets

To use saved printer driver settings:

3. In the Presets menu, select the printing preset.
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select the standard or Default

Settings option.
Print a cover page with Mac

To print a cover page:

3. Open the Cover Page menu, and then select where to print the cover page.
Click either the Before Document button or the After Document button.
4. In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on
the cover page.
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select the standard option from the Cover Page
Type menu.
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac
To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper:

2. Select the product from the Printer list.
3. Open the Layout menu.
4. From the Pages per Sheet menu, select the number of pages that you want
to print on each sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages
on the sheet.
6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page
on the sheet.
Automatic duplex printing with Mac

To specify duplex printing:
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job.
3. Open the Layout menu.
4. From the Two-Sided menu, select a binding option. This sets the default
binding; subsequent duplex jobs can be printed by simply checking the Two-
Sided checkbox next to the Copies field.
Plug and Print USB Drive printing

The HP Officejet Pro X551 and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series feature
printing from a USB flash drive, so you can quickly print files without sending them from a
computer. The products accept standard USB storage accessories in the USB port on the
front and back of the product.
You can print the following types of files:
 .PDF
 .JPEG
 .JPG
 .PNG
 .TIFF
To print from the USB drive:
1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port on the front or back of the product.
The Plug and Print menu opens.

2. Select a document from the list of documents and folders on the USB
device.
3. Touch the Settings button to modify the print settings for the job, if
necessary.
4. Touch Start Black or Start Color to start the print job.
5. To scan a document and save it as a .JPEG or .PDF file onto the USB drive
(HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series only), load the document onto
the scanner glass or into the document feeder. Touch the Scan to USB
Drive item. Touch the Settings button to adjust the scan settings.
Mobile printing overview

The following mobile printing topics are covered in this section:

 HP ePrint Mobile Driver
 Apple AirPrint™
HP ePrint via email

Use HP ePrint to print documents by sending them as an email attachment to the product's
email address from any email enabled device.
Documents printed with HP ePrint may appear different from the original. Style, formatting,
and text flow may differ from the original document. For documents that need to be printed
with a higher quality (such as legal documents), HP recommends printing from the software
application.
NOTE: The product must be connected to a wired or wireless network and have Internet
access to use HP ePrint.
To use HP ePrint:
1. From the Home screen on the product control panel, select the Web
Services button.
2. Press or touch the Enable Web Services button.
3. From the HP Web Services menu, touch the Display E-Mail
Address button to display the product's email address on the control panel.
4. Use the HP ePrint Center Web site to define security settings and configure
default print settings for all HP ePrint jobs sent to this product.
o Go to www.hpeprintcenter.com.
o Click Sign In, and enter HP ePrintCenter credentials or sign up
for a new account.
o Select a product from the list, or click + Add printer to add a

product. A printer code is needed to add a product The printer
code is the segment of the product email address that is before
the @ symbol.
NOTE: This code is valid for only 24 hours from the time

HP Web Services are enabled. If it expires, follow the
instructions to enable HP Web Services again, and obtain a
new code.
o To prevent the product from printing unexpected documents,

click ePrint Settings, and then click the Allowed Senders tab.
Click Allowed Senders Only, and add allowed mail addresses.
o To set up default settings for all ePrint jobs sent to this product,
click ePrint Settings, click Print Options.
5. To print a document, attach it to an email message sent to the product's

email address.
NOTE: The email will be printed once it is received. As with any email,

there is no guarantee when, or whether, it will be received. To check
the print status, go to www.eprintcenter.com.
HP ePrint Mobile Driver

The HP ePrint Mobile Driver makes it easy to print from a desktop or laptop computer to
any HP ePrintcapable product. After installing the driver, open the Print option from within
your application, and select HP ePrint Mobile from the installed printers list. This single
driver makes it easy to find HP ePrint-enabled products that are registered to an
ePrintCenter account. The target HP product can be local or in a remote location, such as a
branch office or across the globe. There are no file type or size limitations.
For Windows, the HP ePrint Mobile Driver also supports traditional direct IP printing to local
network printers on the network (LAN or WAN) to supported PostScript® products.
Go to www.hp.com/go/eprintmobiledriver for drivers and information.
HP ePrint supported operating systems:
 Windows® XP (32-bit, SP 2 or greater)
NOTE: Microsoft retired mainstream support for Windows XP in April

2009. HP will continue to provide best-effort support for the discontinued
XP operating system.
 Windows Vista® (32-bit and 64-bit)

 Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
 Windows .Net 3.5 SP1
NOTE: Windows .Net 3.5 is installed when not using the Add Printer
wizard.
 Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6
NOTE: The HP ePrint Mobile Driver is a PDF workflow utility for Mac,

and is not technically a print driver. HP ePrint Mobile for Mac supports
print paths only through ePrintcenter and does not support direct IP
printing to local network printers.
Apple AirPrint™
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS 4.2 and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
When using the AirPrint driver, the options and settings will differ from the full-featured
driver provided by HP.
Use AirPrint to print directly to the product from an iPad (iOS 4.2), iPhone (3GS or
later), or iPod touch (third generation or later) in the following mobile applications:
 Mail
 Photos
 Safari
 Select third-party applications
To use AirPrint, the product must be connected to a wireless network.

For more information about using AirPrint and about which HP products are compatible
with AirPrint, go to www.hp.com/go/airprint.
NOTE: You might need to upgrade the product firmware to use AirPrint. Go to
www.hp.com/ support/ojpx451 or www.hp.com/support/ojpx551.
Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a cloud-based service from Google Inc. that enables Web-connected
devices, including phones, tablets, and computers, to print to a Cloud Print printer that is
connected to the Internet.
The sender must be logged into a Google account, and the HP ePrint-assigned email
address of the printer must be registered with Google Cloud Print.
NOTE: Additional information about Google Cloud Print is available at
www.google.com/cloudprint.
HP Wireless Direct overview

Connect a computer, smart phone, tablet, or other Wi-Fi capable device directly to the HP
printer with HP Wireless Direct to print wirelessly, without a router from Wi-Fi capable
devices.
 HP printing software is required for printing over Wireless Direct from a

computer. A compatible printing application is required for printing over
Wireless Direct from a smart phone or tablet.
 A Wireless Direct connection is turned on and managed from the printer’s
control panel.
 If your WiFi capable device supports WPA2 encryption, you can enable
security when setting up a Wireless Direct connection.
 Five devices or fewer can simultaneously use Wireless Direct to connect to
the printer.
 A Wireless Direct connection can be used while the printer is also connected
to a wireless network or a USB cable.
 Wireless Direct cannot connect to the internet.
Connect and print from a WiFi capable mobile device

To connect and print from a WiFI capable mobile device:
 Setup the printer
A compatible print application is required for printing from a mobile device.

If the mobile print application can print over a wireless network connection,
you can print over Wireless Direct.
 Turn on the Wireless Direct connection
o Press or touch the Setup button from the control panel.
o Open the Network menu.
o Open the Wireless Direct menu.
o Select On to enable Wireless Direct connections or select On

With Security to enable secure, Wireless Direct connections to
the printer.
 Turn on the mobile device’s Wi-Fi capability.
NOTE: Compatible with mobile devices with HP ePrint mobile app installed, HP Printer
Control app installed, Apple devices with iOS 4.2+, and HP webOS devices.
Connect and print from a WiFi capable computer over a wireless router and
Wireless Direct
To connect and print from a WiFi capable computer over a wireless router and
Wireless Direct:
Setup and install the printer over a wireless router.

Make sure you can successfully print over the wireless router before
proceeding.


the printer.
 Turn on the mobile device’s Wi-Fi capability

 Connect to Wireless Direct
From the computer, search for and connect to the Wireless Direct name for
the printer, such as HP-Setup-xx-Officejet Pro X551
 Print
From the computer, select print, and then confirm to print the document
Connect and print from a WiFi capable computer over Wireless Direct only
To connect and print from a WiFi capable computer over Wireless Direct only:
Setup the printer, but do not install the HP printer software.

the printer.
 Turn on the computer’s Wi-Fi capability.

the printer, such as HP-Setup-xx-Officejet Pro X551.
 Install the HP printer software.
o When the Connection Options software screen is shown,

select Wireless.
o When the list of detected printers is shown, select your HP printer,
and then finish installing.
Change from printing over USB to a Wireless Direct connection

To Change from printing over USB to a Wireless Direct connection:
Setup the printer with a USB connection.

the printer.
 Turn on the computer’s Wi-Fi capability.

the printer, such as HP-Setup-xx-Officejet Pro X576
 Configure the printer software to print over Wireless Direct.
o Select Windows Start button > All Programs > HP > HP Officejet

Pro X551 MFP Series Printer Setup & Software.
o Select Connect New Printer
IMPORTANT! Do not select Convert a USB connected

printer to wireless.
o When the Connection Options software screen is shown,

select Wireless.
o When the list of detected printers is shown, select your HP printer,

and then finish installing.
 Print
To print over Wireless Direct, select the printer labeled (Network) from the
Windows Printers group in the software application.
NOTE: There will be two instances of the printer in the Printers group,
select the printer name followed by (Network).
Copy functions overview

CAUTION: When using the document feeder, ensure there are no staples in your
document.
CAUTION: When performing a copy, ensure the scan lid is closed.
 Single-page original
 Multiple copies
 Multiple-page original
 Identification cards
 Reduce or enlarge a copy
 Mixed size originals
 Copy on both sides
 Copy a photo
 Copy edge-to edge
 Copy a document with cropped edges
 Collate a copy job
 Cancel a copy job
Single-page original
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass or into the document feeder.
2. From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

3. Touch the Black or Color button to start copying.
Multiple copies

3. Touch the arrows to change the number of copies, or touch the existing
number and type the number of copies.
Multiple-page original
1. Inset the originals into the document feeder face-up.

2. Adjust the guides until they are snug against the paper.

Identification cards
Use the ID Copy feature to copy both sides of identification cards, or small-size
documents, onto the same side of one sheet of paper. The product prompts you to copy the
first side and then to place the second side on a different area of the scanner glass and
copy again. The product prints both images at the same time.
1. Load the document onto the scanner glass.

3. Touch the Settings button, and then touch ID Copy.
5. The product prompts you to place the next page on a different section of the
scanner glass.
6. Touch the OK button if you have more pages to copy, or touch

the Done button if this is the last page.
7. The product copies all pages onto one side of a sheet of paper.
Reduce or enlarge a copy

3. Touch the Settings button, and then touch the Reduce/Enlarge button.
Touch the arrow buttons to scroll through the options, and then touch an
option to select it.
Mixed size originals
Use the scanner glass to make copies of mixed size originals.
NOTE: You can use the document feeder to copy mixed size originals only if the pages
share a common dimension. For example, you can combine Letter and Legal size pages
because they have the same width. Stack the pages so the top edges are even with each
other and so the pages have the same width but varying lengths.
1. Load paper into the tray that is large enough for the largest page in the
original document.
2. Place one page of the original document face down in the upper left corner
of the scanner glass.

4. Touch the Settings button, and then scroll to and touch the Tray
Selection button.
5. From the list of paper sizes, touch the name of the paper size that is loaded
in the tray.
7. Repeat these steps for each page.
Copy on both sides

3. Touch the Two-Sided button.
4. Select the duplexing option that you want to use. For example, to copy a
two-sided original with two-sided output, select the 2-Sided to 2-
Sided option.
6. Print or copy edge-to-edge

7. The product cannot print fully edge-to-edge. The maximum printing area is 203.2 x
347 mm (8 x 13.7 in), leaving a 4.23 mm (1/6 inch) unprintable border around the
page.
Documents with cropped edges

Considerations for printing or scanning documents with cropped edges:
 When the original is smaller than the output size, move the original 5 mm
(3/16 inch) away from the corner indicated by the icon on the scanner.
Recopy or scan in this position.
 When the original is the size of the desired output, use the Reduce/Enlarge
feature to reduce the image so the copy is not cropped.
Collate a copy job

3. Touch the Settings button, and then touch the Collate button.
Cancel a copy job
1. Touch the Cancel button on the product control panel.
NOTE: Use the Cancel button if the current job screen has not timed

out. You can also cancel the job from the queue of the status bar.
2. Remove the remaining pages from the document feeder.
Copy settings overview

When you change the copy settings at the control panel, the custom settings remain in
effect for approximately 2 minutes after the job completes, and then the product returns to
the default settings. To immediately return to the default settings, press the Cancel
button from the Home screen.
 Adjust the lightness or darkness for copies

 Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper
Adjust the lightness or darkness for copies

To adjust the lightness or darkness for copies:

3. Touch the Settings button, select Lighter/ Darker, and then touch the arrow
buttons to adjust the setting.
Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper
To set the paper size and type for copying on special paper:

2. Touch the Settings button, and then scroll to and touch the Tray
Selection button.
3. Set the paper size/type as needed for the tray.
NOTE: Your settings can be saved as defaults for the tray.
Scan functions overview

Use the product to scan a document from the scanner glass or document feeder.
CAUTION: When using the document feeder, ensure there are no staples in the document.
CAUTION: For best scan quality, close scanner lid before turning on the printer. This will
allow the scanner to calibrate.
 Scan to USB drive from the product control panel.

 Scan from a computer by using HP Scan software.
 Scan from TWAIN-compliant or Windows Imaging Application (WIA)-
compliant software.
 Scan using optical character recognition (OCR) software.
 Cancel a scan.
Scan to USB drive

To scan to the USB drive:
1. Load the document or photo onto the scanner glass or into the document
feeder.
2. Connect a USB drive into the port on the front or back of the product.
3. From the Home screen, touch the Scan button.

4. Touch the Scan to USB Drive screen.
5. Touch the Scan button to scan and save the file. The product creates a
folder named HP on the USB drive, and it saves the file in .PDF or .JPG
format using an automatically generated file name.
Scan from HP scanning software

Use the HP software to scan documents into editable text, a format that allows you to
search, copy, paste, and edit within the scanned document. Use this format to edit letters,
newspaper clippings, and many other documents.
To scan from HP scanning software using Windows:
1. Load the original print-side down on the left–rear corner of the glass or print-
side up in the document feeder.
2. Click Start from the computer desktop to open the HP scanning software.
3. Select Programs or All Programs
4. Select the folder for the HP printer.
5. Select HP Scan.
6. Select a scan shortcut. Make changes to the scan settings, if needed.
7. To start the scan, click Scan.
Scan from HP scanning software using Mac OS X:
1. Load your original print-side down on the left–rear corner of the glass or
print-side up in the document feeder.
2. Double-click the HP Scan icon. This icon is located in the HP folder in
the Applications folder at the top level of the hard disk.
3. Follow the prompts to complete the scan.
TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant programs

The product is TWAIN-compliant and Windows Imaging Application (WIA)-compliant. The
product works with Windows-based programs that support TWAIN-compliant or WIA-
compliant scanning devices and with Macintosh-based programs that support TWAIN-
compliant scanning devices.
While you are in a TWAIN-compliant or WIA-compliant program, you can gain access to the
scanning feature and scan an image directly into the open program.
 Scan from a TWAIN-compliant program
Generally, a software program is TWAIN-compliant if it has a command such

as Acquire, File Acquire, Scan, Import New Object, Insert from,
or Scanner. If you are unsure whether the program is compliant or you do not
know what the command is called, see the software program Help or
documentation.
When scanning from a TWAIN-compliant program, the HP Scan software
program might start automatically. If the HP Scan program starts, you can
make changes while previewing the image. If the program does not start
automatically, the image goes to the TWAIN-compliant program immediately.
Start the scan from within the TWAIN-compliant program. See the software
program Help or documentation for information about the commands and
steps to use.
 Scan from a WAI-compliant program
WIA is another way to scan an image directly into a software program. WIA
uses Microsoft software to scan, instead of the HP Scan software.
Generally, a software program is WIA-compliant if it has a command such
as Picture/From Scanner or Camera in the Insert or File menu. If you are
unsure whether the program is WIA-compliant, see the software program
Help or documentation.
Start the scan from within the WIA-compliant program. See the software
program Help or documentation for information about the commands and
steps to use.
-OR-
From the Windows control panel, in the Cameras and Scanner folder
(located inside the Hardware and Sound folder for Windows Vista and
Windows 7), double-click the product icon. This opens the standard Microsoft
WIA Wizard, which enables you to scan to a file.
Scan by using OCR software.

To import scanned text into your preferred word-processing program for editing, open the
HP Scan software and select the shortcut named Save as Editable Text (OCR).
You can also use third-party OCR software. The Readiris Pro OCR program is included on
a separate CD that shipped with the product. To use the Readiris Pro program, install it
from the appropriate software CD, and then follow the instructions in the online Help.
Cancel a scan
To cancel a scan job, use one of the following procedure:
 On the product control panel, touch the Cancel button.

 Select and delete the job from the status bar after the time-out occurs.
Resolution and color

Resolution and color affect the following qualities of scanned images:
 Clarity
 Texture of gradations (smooth or rough)
 Scan time
 File size
Scanning resolution is measured in pixels per inch (ppi).

Color, grayscale, and black and white define the number of colors possible
You can adjust the scanner hardware resolution to up to 600 ppi.
Setting the resolution and color to a higher values can create large files on disk and slow
the scanning process.
Before setting the resolution and color, determine how you are going to use the scanned
image.
The resolution and color guidelines table lists simple tips that you can follow to meet your
scanning needs.
NOTE: Scanning ppi levels are not interchangeable with printing dpi (dots per inch) levels.
Resolution and color guidelines table
Intended use Recommended Recommended color settings

resolution
Fax 300 dpi  Black and White

Intended use Recommended Recommended color settings
resolution
 Black and White, if the image

does not require smooth
gradation
eMail 300 dpi  Grayscale, if the image requires
smooth gradation
 Color, if the image is in color
 Black and White

Edit text 300 dpi
 Grayscale for shaded or colored

Print
600 dpi for normal graphics and photos
(graphics or
graphics and text  Color, if the image is in color
text)
 Black and White for text

 Grayscale for graphics and
Display on
75 dpi photos
screen
 Color,if the image is in color
Fax settings overview

 Send-fax settings
 Receive-fax settings
 Fax Polling
 Fax memory
Send fax settings overview
 Special dialing symbols and options

 Dialing prefix
 Dialing mode
 Auto-redial
 Light/dark
 Resolution
 Cover-page templates
 Special dialing symbols and options

 You can insert pauses into a fax number that you are dialing. Pauses are often
needed when dialing internationally or connecting to an outside line. To access
these symbols, touch the * character on the key pad.
Special Button Description

symbol
The W button is available on the control panel keypad for

Pause for entering a fax number. This character causes the product to
dial tone wait for a dial tone before dialing the remainder of the
telephone number.
The R button is available on the control panel keypad for

Hook
entering a fax number. This character causes the product to
flash
insert a hook flash.
Set a dialing prefix

A dial prefix is a number or group of numbers that are automatically added to the beginning
of every fax number you enter at the control panel or from the software. The maximum
number of characters for a dial prefix is 50.
The default setting is Off. You might want to turn this setting on and enter a prefix if, for
example, you have to dial a number such as 9 to get a telephone line outside of your
company telephone system. While this setting is active, you can dial a fax number without
the dial prefix by using manual dial.
To set a dialing prefix:
1. From the Home screen, touch the Setup button

2. Touch the Fax Setup menu.
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.
4. Scroll to and touch the Dial Prefix button, and then touch the On button.
5. Use the keypad to enter the prefix, and then touch the Done button. You can
use numbers, pauses, and dialing symbols.
Set the dialing mode

Use this procedure to set the product to tone-dialing or pulse-dialing mode. The factory-set
default is Tone Dialing. Do not change this setting unless you know that the telephone line
cannot use tone dialing.
NOTE: pulse-dialing is not available in all countries/regions.
To set the dialing mode:
3. Touch the Basic Setup menu.
4. Scroll to and touch the Dial Type button, and then touch the Tone
Dialing or Pulse Dialing button.
Autoredial overview
If the product is unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not
answer or was busy, the product attempts to redial based on the following options:
 redial-on-busy
 redial-on-no-answer
 redial-oncommunication-error
Set the redial-on-busy option

If this option is on, the product redials automatically if it receives a busy signal. The factory-
set default for the redial-on-busy option is On.
To set the redial-on-busy option:

3. Touch the Advanced Fax Setup menu.
4. Touch the Redial Setup button.
5. Scroll to and touch the Busy Redial button, and then touch the On button.
Set the redial-on-no-answer option

If this option is on, the product redials automatically if the receiving machine does not
answer. The factory-set default for the redial-on-no-answer option is Off.
To set the redial-on-no-answer option:

5. Scroll to and touch the No Answer Redial button, and then touch
the On button.
Set the redial-on-communication-error option

If this option is on, the product redials automatically if some sort of communication error
occurs. The factory-set default for the redial-on-communication-error option is On.
NOTE: The redial on communication error functionality is only available with Scan and Fax,
Send Fax Later, or Broadcast Fax methods.
To set the redial-on-communication-error option:
5. Scroll to and touch the Communications Error Redial button, and then
touch the On button.
Adjust lightness or darkness

This setting affects the lightness and darkness of an outgoing fax as it is being sent.
The default light/dark setting is normally applied to items that are being faxed. The slider is
set to the middle as the default setting.
To adjust lightness or darkness for outgoing fax items:
1. From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

2. Touch the Settings menu.
3. Touch the Lighter/Darker button, and then touch one of the arrows to adjust
the slider.
Change the default Resolution

The factory-set default resolution setting is Fine.
Resolution settings:
 Standard: This setting provides the lowest quality and the fastest
transmission.
 Fine: This setting provides a higher resolution quality than Standard, which is
usually appropriate for text documents.
 Very Fine: This setting is best used for documents that mix text and images.
The transmission time is slower than the Fine setting.
 Photo: This setting is best for documents that contain images.
NOTE: Increasing the resolution increases the fax size. Larger faxes increase the send
time and could exceed the available memory in the product.
To set the default resolution setting for all fax jobs:

2. Touch the Settings menu.
3. Touch the Resolution button, and then touch one of the options.
4. Cover page templates

5. Several business and personal fax cover-page templates are available in the
HP Digital Fax software program.
6. NOTE: You cannot alter cover-sheet templates, but you can edit the fields within
the templates.
Receive-fax settings overview

 Fax forwarding
 Block or unblock fax numbers
 Number of rings-to-answer
 Distinctive rings
 Auto-reduction for incoming faxes
 Fax sounds volume
 Stamp-received faxes
Fax forwarding
The product can forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When the fax arrives at the
product, it is stored in the memory. The product then dials the specified forwarding fax
number and sends the fax. If the product cannot forward a fax because of an error (for
example, the number is busy) and repeated redial attempts are unsuccessful, the product
prints the fax.
If the product runs out of memory while receiving a fax, it terminates the incoming fax and
only forwards the pages and partial pages that have been stored in the memory.
To set up Fax forwarding:

4. Touch the Forward Fax button, and touch the On button.
5. Use the keypad to enter the fax-forwarding number, and then touch
the Done button.
NOTE: When using the fax-forwarding feature, the product (rather than the computer) must
be receiving the faxes, and the answer mode must be set to Automatic.
Block or unblock fax numbers

The product can block as many as 30 fax numbers from specific people or businesses.
When the product receives a fax from a blocked number, the control-panel display indicates
that the number is blocked, the fax does not print, and the fax is not saved in memory.
Faxes from blocked fax numbers appear in the fax activity log with a “discarded”
designation. You can unblock blocked fax numbers individually or all at one time.
NOTE: Faxing blocking is only supported where the caller ID feature is supported.
To block or unblock fax numbers:

3. Touch the Basic Fax Setup menu.
4. Touch the Block Junk Faxes button.
5. Touch the Add Numbers button.
6. Use the keypad to enter the fax number, and then touch the Done button.
NOTE: The sender of a blocked fax is not notified that the fax failed.
Number of rings-to-answer
When the answer mode is set to Automatic, the product rings-to-answer setting
determines the number of times the telephone rings before the product answers an
incoming call.
If the product is connected to a telephone line that receives both fax and voice calls (a
shared line) and that also uses an answering machine, the rings-to-answer setting may
need to be adjusted. The number of rings-to-answer for the product must be greater than
the rings-to-answer on the answering machine. This allows the answering machine to
answer the incoming call and record a message if it is a voice call. When the answering
machine answers the call, the product listens to the call and automatically answers it if it
detects fax tones.
The default setting for rings-to-answer is five for the U.S. and Canada, and two for other
countries/regions.
Use the following table to determine the number of rings-to-answer to use:
Type of telephone line Recommended rings-to-answer setting
Dedicated fax line Shared line (receiving both fax and voice calls) with an
(receiving only fax calls) attached answering machine or computer voicemail
One or two rings. (If you have an answering machine or

computer voicemail for the other telephone number,
One line with two
make sure that the product is set to a greater number of
separate numbers and a
rings than the answering system. Also, use the
ring-pattern service
distinctive-ring feature to differentiate between voice
and fax calls.)
Shared line (receiving

both fax and voice calls)
Five rings or more.
with only an attached
telephone
Shared line (receiving

both fax and voice calls)
Two rings more than the answering machine or
with an attached
computer voicemail.
answering machine or
computer voicemail
To set or change the number of rings-to-answer:

3. Touch the Basic Fax Setup menu.
4. Touch the Rings to Answer button.
5. Use the keypad to enter the number of rings, and then touch
the Done button.
Distinctive ring
Ring-pattern or distinctive-ring service is available through some local telephone
companies. The service allows you to have more than one telephone number on a single
line. Each telephone number has a unique ring pattern, so that you can answer voice calls
and the product can answer fax calls.
If you subscribe to a ring-pattern service with a telephone company, you must set the
product to answer the correct ring pattern. Not all countries/regions support unique ring
patterns. Contact the telephone company to determine if this service is available in your
country/region.
NOTE: If you do not have ring-pattern service and you change the ring-pattern settings to
something other than the default, All Rings, the product might not be able to receive faxes.
Distinctive ring options:
 Ring Pattern Detection: Turn off or on the product's ring pattern detection
capability.
 All Rings: The product answers any calls that come through the telephone
line.
 Single: The product answers any calls that produce a single-ring pattern.
 Double: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring pattern.
 Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a triple-ring pattern.
 Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a double-ring
or triple-ring pattern.
To set a distinctive ring option:

4. Touch the Distinctive Ring button, and then touch the name of an option.
Auto-reduction for incoming faxes

The factory-set default for incoming fax auto-reduction is On.
When using Fax Stamping set autoreduction On to reduce the size of the incoming faxes
slightly, and prevent the page-stamp from forcing a fax onto two pages.
NOTE: Make sure that the default paper size setting matches the size of the paper in the
tray.
To set auto-reduction for incoming faxes:

4. Touch the Automatic Reduction button, and then touch the On button.
5. Fax sounds volume

6. Use to control the volume of the fax sounds from the control panel.
Stamp-received faxes
The product prints the sender identification information at the top of each received fax.
Stamp incoming faxes with your own header information to confirm the date and time that
the fax was received. The factory-set default for stamp-received faxes is Off.
NOTE: Turning on the stamp-received setting might increase the page size and cause the
product to print a second page.
To set fax stamping:

4. Touch the Fax Stamping button, and then touch the On or Off button.
NOTE: This option applies only to received faxes that the product prints.
Fax polling
If someone else has set up a fax to be polled (sent on demand), you can request that the
fax be sent to your product. (This is known as polling another machine).
To set fax polling:

2. Touch the Fax Methods menu.
3. Touch the Poll to Receive button.
4. Use the keypad to enter the number of the fax machine that you want to poll,
and then touch the Start Fax button.
The product dials the other fax machine and requests the fax.
Clear the fax memory

Fax memory contents are retained when there is a loss of power. The product's NEND
memory protects against data loss when a power failure occurs. NAND RAM can maintain
its data for years without power applied.
To delete faxes from the memory:

3. Touch the Fax Tools menu.
4. Touch the Clear Fax Log button.
CAUTION: In addition to clearing the reprint memory, this procedure clears any fax that is
currently being sent, unsent faxes that are pending redial, faxes that are scheduled to be
sent at a future time, and faxes that are not printed or forwarded.
Fax functions overview

 Cancel a fax
 Use the phone book
 Send a fax
 Receive a fax
Cancel a fax
 Cancel the current fax job
Press the Cancel button on the control panel if the current job screen
has not timed out. You may also go to the status bar and select the job to
cancel it after it has timed out.
 Cancel a pending fax job
Use this procedure to cancel a fax job that has encountered a busy signal, an
unanswered call, or a communication error; or a fax that is scheduled to be
sent at a future time.
To cancel a fax job from the Fax Job Status menu:

2. Touch the Fax Job Status button.
3. Touch the fax number to cancel the fax job.
Use the phone book

The product can store frequently dialed fax numbers (up to 75 entries) either as individual
fax numbers or as group entries.
To create and edit speed-dial entries:

2. Touch the Speed-Dial Setup menu.
3. Touch the Add/Edit Speed-Dial button.
4. Touch an unassigned number from the list.
5. When prompted, use the keypad to enter a number for the entry, and then
touch the Next button.
6. Use the keypad to enter a name for the fax number, and then touch
the Done button.
To delete speed-dial entries:

3. Touch the Delete Speed-Dial button.
4. Touch the entry that you want to delete.
To create a speed dial group:

2. Touch the Speed- Dial Setup menu.
3. Touch the Group Speed-Dial button.
5. Touch the name of each individual entry that you want to include in the
group. When you are finished, touch the OK button.
6. Use the keypad to enter a name for the group, and then touch
the Done button.
To create an individual entry for each fax number that you want in a group:

3. Touch the Add/Edit Speed-Dial button.
5. Use the keypad to enter the fax number for the entry, and then touch
the Next button.
6. Use the keypad to enter a name for the entry, and then touch
the Done button.
Send a fax overview

 Fax from the flatbed scanner

 Fax from the document feeder
 Send a standard fax from the computer
 Send a fax from the software
 Send a fax by dialing from a telephone connected to the fax line
 Send a fax with confirmation
 Schedule a fax to be sent later
 Send a fax using monitor dialing
Fax from the flatbed scanner

To fax from the flatbed scanner:
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass.

3. Use the keypad to type the fax number.
4. Touch the Start Black or Start Color button.
5. The product scans the first page. If the document has multiple pages, load
the next page and touch the Yes button. Continue this process until you
have scanned all the pages.
6. When you have scanned the last page, touch the No button at the prompt.
The product sends the fax.
Fax from the document feeder
To fax from the document feeder:
1. Insert the originals into the document feeder face-up.

2. Adjust the paper guides until they are snug against the paper.

4. Use the keypad to type the fax number.
Use speed dials and group-dial entries

To fax using speed dials and group-dial entries:
1. Load the document into the document feeder or onto the scanner glass.

3. On the keypad, touch the Speed-Dial icon.
4. Touch the name of the individual or group entry that you want to use.
Send a standard fax from the computer

You can send a document on your computer as a fax, without printing a copy and faxing it
from the printer. To use this feature, you must install the printer software using the
installation program provided on the HP software CD provided with the printer.
NOTE: Faxes sent from your computer by this method use the printer’s fax connection, not
your Internet connection or computer modem. Therefore, make sure the printer is
connected to a working telephone line and that the fax function is set up and functioning
correctly.
To send a standard fax from the computer using Windows:
1. Open the document on the computer.

2. On the File menu in the software application, click Print.
3. From the Name list, select the printer that has “fax” in the name.
4. To change settings (such as Orientation, Page Order, Pages Per Sheet),
click the button that opens the Properties dialog box. Depending on the
software application, this button might be
called Properties, Options, Printer Setup, Printer, or Preferences.
5. Change any settings and click OK.
6. Enter the fax number and other information for the recipient, change any
further settings for the fax (such as selecting to send the document as a
black fax or a color fax), and then click Send Fax. The printer begins dialing
the fax number and faxing the document.
To send a standard fax from the computer using Mac OS X:
1. Open the document on the computer.

2. On the File menu in the software application, click Print.
3. From the Name list, select the printer that has “fax” in the name.
4. Select Fax Information from the pop-up menu.
If you cannot find the pop-up menu, try clicking the disclosure triangle next to
the Printer selection.
5. Enter the fax number and other information in the boxes provided.
6. Select any other fax options, and then click Fax to begin dialing the fax
number and faxing the document.
TIP: To send a color fax, select Fax Options from the pop-up menu, and then click Color.
Send a fax from the software

To fax electronic documents from a computer, the product must be connected directly to
the computer or to a network to which the computer is connected. the product software
must be installed on the computer, and the computer operating system must be supported
by this product.
To send a fax from the software:
1. Click Start, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP), and then

click HP.
2. Click the product name, and then click HP Printer Assistant
3. Click the Send a Fax icon to open the fax software.
4. Load the document onto the scanner glass.
5. Enter a recipient or add one from the address book.
6. Click the Add Cover Page button and then click the Add Scan button to
scan the document on the scanner glass and add it to the fax job.
7. Click the Send Fax button to send the fax
Send a fax by dialing from a telephone connected to the fax line

Use to send a fax to a device that is in manual receive mode. The fax message is preceded
by a voice call to let the person know that the fax is coming.
NOTE: The telephone must be connected on the same telephone line as the printer (but
through a separate port).
To send a fax by dialing from a telephone connected to the fax line:
1. Load the document into the document feeder.

3. Pick up the handset of a telephone that is connected to the same line as the
product. Dial the fax number by using the telephone keypad.
4. When the recipient answers, instruct the person to start the fax machine.
5. When you hear the fax tones, touch the Start Fax button on the control
panel, wait until Connecting appears on the control panel display, and then
hang up the telephone.
Send a fax with confirmation

Use to set the product so that it prompts you to enter the fax number a second time to
confirm that you are sending the fax to the correct number:
To send a fax with confirmation:

4. Scroll to and touch the Fax Confirmation menu, and then touch
the On button.
5. Send the fax.
Schedule a fax to be sent later

Use the product control panel to schedule a fax to be sent automatically at a future time to
one or more destinations. After you have entered the scheduled time, the document is
scanned into memory and then returns to the Ready state.
If a fax has been scheduled to be sent at a future time but it requires updating, send the
additional information as another job. All faxes that are scheduled to go to the same fax
number at the same time are delivered as individual faxes.
To schedule a fax to be sent later:
1. Load the document into the document feeder.

3. Touch the Fax Methods button.
4. Touch the Send Fax Later button.
5. Use the keypad to enter the time of day to send the fax. Touch
the OK button.
6. Use the keypad to enter the date to send the fax. Touch the OK button.
7. Use the keypad to type the fax number or select one from the phone
book/speed-dial list. Touch the OK button. The product scans the document
and saves the file in memory until the designated time.
NOTE: If the product cannot transmit the fax at the scheduled time, that information is
indicated on the fax error report (if that option is turned on) or recorded in the fax activity
log. The transmittal might not be initiated because the fax-sending call is not answered, or
because a busy signal stops the redial attempts.
Send a fax using monitor dialing

Dials a number from the printer control panel. When you send a fax using monitor dialing,
you can hear the dial tones, telephone prompts, or other sounds through the speakers on
the printer. This enables you to respond to prompts while dialing, as well as control the
pace of your dialing.
NOTE: Make sure the volume is turned on to hear the dial tone.
To send a fax using monitor dialing:
1. Load the originals.

2. Touch Fax, and then touch Start Black or Start Color.
if the printer detects an original loaded in the automatic document feeder,

you hear a dial tone.
3. When you hear the dial tone, enter the number by using the keypad on the
printer control panel.
4. Follow any prompts that might occur. The fax is sent when the receiving fax
machine answers.
TIP: If you are using a calling card to send a fax and you have your
calling card PIN stored as a speed dial, when prompted to enter your
PIN, touch Speed Dial to select the speed dial entry where you have
your PIN stored.
Manual dialing
To use access codes, credit cards, or calling cards, dial manually to allow for pauses and
dialing codes.
To send a fax to an international destination, dial manually to allow for pauses and
international dialing codes.
Receive a fax
To print a fax:

2. Touch the Fax Setup button.
3. Touch the Fax Tools button.
4. Touch the Reprint Faxes button.
5. Touch the entry for the fax that you want to reprint.
NOTE: The product stores about 2MB of memory. This is approximately 100 black and
white A4 pages at Fine resolution.
These faxes are stored continuously. Reprinting a fax does not clear it from the memory.
To receive faxes when fax tones are audible on the phone line If you have a
telephone line that receives both fax and telephone calls:
 If you are close to the product, press the Start Fax button on the control panel
 If not, press 1-2-3 in sequence on the telephone keypad, listen for fax
transmission sounds, and then hang up.
Manage and Maintain overview

 Printer information pages
 HP Embeded Web Server
 HP Web Jetadmin software
 Product security features
 Economy settings
 Product updates
Printer information pages overview

Information pages reside within the product memory. These reports help diagnose and
solve problems with the product.
The following reports are covered in this section:
 Printer Status Report

 Print Quality Report
 Printer Usage Report
 Network Configuration Page
 Event Log
 Fax Reports (MFP models only)
 PCL Font List
 PCL6 Font List
 PS Font List
To print a report:
1. From the Home screen, touch or press the Setup button.

2. Touch or press the Print Reports button.
3. Select the name of the report that you want to print.
NOTE: If the product language was not correctly set during installation, you can set the
language manually so the information pages print in one of the supported languages.
Change the language by using the Device Setup menu on the control panel or the EWS.
Printer Status Report

The Printer Status Report prints the ink cartridge status. It includes the following
information:
 Estimated percentage of cartridge life remaining.

 Approximate number of pages remaining.
 Part numbers for the HP ink cartridges.
 Number of pages printed.
 Information about ordering new HP ink cartridges.
 Information about recycling used HP ink cartridges.

 Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality.
 Printer Usage
 Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists
whether they were monochrome or color, simplex or duplex, and reports the page
count. This report is useful for reconciling contractual billing statements.
Network Configuration Page
The Network Configuration Page displays the status of the following:
 Network hardware configuration.

 Enabled features
 TCP/IP and SNMP information
 Network statistics
 Wireless network configuration (wireless models only)
 Event Log
 Prints a log of errors and other events during product use.
Fax Reports (MFP models only)
 Fax Confirmation Report: Reports a successful fax job.

 Fax Error Report: Reports a failed fax job.
 Last Transaction Report: Detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent
or received.
 Fax Service Report: Lists the last 40 entries in the fax log.
 Speed Dial List Report: Lists all speed dials that have been set up for this
product.
 Caller ID Report: Lists all incoming fax phone numbers.
 Junk Fax Report: Lists phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes
to this product.
Font Reports
 PCL Font List
Prints a list of all PCL fonts that are installed
 PCL6 Font List
Prints a list of all PCL6 fonts that are installed.
 PS Font List
Prints a list of a PS fonts that are installed.
HP Embedded Web Server Overview

This product is equipped with an embedded Web server (EWS), which provides access to
information about product and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in
which Web programs may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as
Windows, provides an environment for programs to run on a computer. The output from
these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser.
An Embedded Web server resides on the printer, in the firmware, rather than as software
that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an EWS is that it provides an interface to the product that anyone with a
network connected product and computer can use. There is no special software to install or
configure, but you must have a supported Web browser on the computer. To gain access to
the EWS, type the IP address for the product in the address line of the browser.
NOTE: For Mac operating systems, you can use the HP EWS over a USB connection after
installing the Mac software included with the product.
Cookies
The HP EWS places very small text files (cookies) on your hard drive when you are
browsing. These files let the HP EWS recognize your computer the next time you visit. For
example, if you have configured the HP EWS language, a cookie helps remember which
language you have selected so that the next time you access the HP EWS, the pages are
displayed in that language. Though some cookies are cleared at the end of each session
(such as the cookie that stores the selected language), others (such as the cookie that
stores customer-specific preferences) are stored on the computer until you clear them
manually.
IMPORTANT! The cookies that the HP EWS stores on your computer are only used for
saving settings on your computer or for sharing information between the printer and the
computer. These cookies are not sent to any HP Websites.
You can configure your browser to accept all cookies, or you can configure it to alert you
every time a cookie is offered, which allows you to decide which cookies to accept or
refuse. You can also use your browser to remove unwanted cookies.
Depending on your printer, if you disable cookies, you also disable one or more of
the following features:
 Starting where you left the application (especially useful when using setup
wizards).
 Remembering the HP EWS browser language setting.
 Personalizing the HP EWS Home page.
NOTE: For information about how to change your privacy and cookie settings and how to
view or delete cookies, see the documentation available with your Web browser.
Open the HP EWS

NOTE: If an error occurs while opening the HP EWS, confirm that the proxy settings are
correct for your network.
To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address or host name of the product in
the address field of a supported Web browser. To find the IP address, print a Printer Status
Report or Network Configuration Page, or get the IP address from the product control
panel.
You can also open the HP EWS from the Windows printer driver. Open the Services tab
and then click the Device and Supplies Status icon.
For Mac, open HP EWS, from the HP Utility or from System Preferences -> Print &
Scan -> [product name] -> Options & Supplies -> General -> Show Printer Webpage.
TIP: After you open the URL, bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
HP Embedded Web Server Features overview

 Home tab
 Scan tab (MFP models only)
 Fax tab (MFP models only)
 Web Services tab
 Network tab
 Tools tab
 Settings tab
NOTE: Changing network settings in the HP EWS might disable some of product, or

product software or features.
Home tab
Use the Home tab to customize various views and tasks related to your device. Settings for
this page are automatically saved in the Web browser's cookies. If the Web browser's
cookies are deleted, these settings are lost.
The Home tab includes the following items:
 Recently Visited: Displays the 5 most recently visited embedded HP EWS

links.
 Printer Status: Displays the current printer status.
 Diagnostic: Provides links to diagnostic tasks.
 ePrint: Displays the status of the ePrint connection.
 Fax Status: (MFP models only) Displays the 5 most recent entries in the fax
log.
 Ink Level Status: Displays the ink level status.
 Manage: Provides useful links for managing the HP EWS.
 Wired Network Status: (wireless models only) Displays wired (802.3) status
or wired (802.11) status.
 Setup: Displays setup options.
 Custom Shortcut: Use to customize quick links to add as a shortcut.
 Support: Links to HP support Web site.
 Scan to Computer: (MFP models only) Starts a scan to a computer
NOTE: Not all of the items are visible by default. Use the Personalize this page button
show or hide the items of your choice.
Scan tab (MFP models only)

Use the Scan tab to configure the product's scan features. The Scan tab includes the
following items:
 Scan to Computer:
Use Webscan to scan to a computer.

To enable Webscan, open the Settings tab, click on Administrator Settings,
click the Enable checkbox beside Webscan, and then click the Apply button.
IMPORTANT! When Webscan is enabled, anyone with access to the
printer can scan whatever is on the scanner glass. For security purposes,
Webscan is disabled by default.
 Scan to Email:
The Scan to Email tab includes the following items:
o Scan to Email Setup: Use to setup the Scan to Email function.
o Outgoing Email Profiles: Use to configure the sender of the

scanned documents.
o Email Address Book: Use to configure the list of people to whom

you can send scanned documents.
o Email Options: Use to configure a default SUBJECT line and body

text and configure the default scan settings.
 Scan to Network Folder:
The Scan to Network Folder tab includes the following item:
o Network Folder Setup: Configure a network folder for saving

scanned images or documents from the printer.
Fax tab (MFP models only)

Use the Fax tab to configure the product's fax features.
The fax tab includes the following items:
 Fax Setup Wizard: Configure the printer's fax feature.

 Basic Fax Settings: Change the header name/fax number and set other
basic fax settings.
 Advanced Fax Settings: Set fax details such as Error Reporting,
Confirmation, etc.
 Fax Speed-dial: Enter and store speed dial numbers.
 Fax Forwarding: Automatically redirect incoming faxes to another fax
number.
 Junk Fax Blocker: Block faxes from specific people or businesses.
 Fax Log: Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by
this product.
 Digital Fax Profile: Save incoming black-and-white faxes to a designated
folder on the network or forward them as email.
 HP Web Services tab

 Use the HP Web Services tab to configure and enable HP Web Services for this
product. You must enable HP Web Services to use the HP ePrint feature.
 Network tab
 Use the Network tab to configure and secure network settings for the product
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not display if the
product is connected to other types of networks.
Tools tab
The tools tab includes the following items:
 Product Information
o Printer Information: Find basic device information such as serial

number, name and firmware version.
o Ink Gauge: See estimated ink levels, ink cartridge part numbers,
and estimated printable pages remaining for each cartridge.
o Ink Settings: Change the threshold at which the printer provides

the "Low on Ink" notification.
 Reports
o Usage Report: View the number of pages processed for printing,

scanning, copying and faxing.
o Printer Reports: Print various reports.
o Event Log: View logged events such as firmware errors.
 Utilities
o Bookmarking: Bookmark pages in the HP EWS.
o Print Quality Toolbox: Run maintenance tools to improve the print

quality of your printouts.
o Asset Tracking: Assign an asset number/location to this device.
 Backup and Restore
o Backup: Create a password-encrypted file that stores the printer's

settings.
o Restore: Restore the printer's settings using a backup file created

by the HP EWS.
 Job Management
Job Monitor: Monitor or cancel jobs currently active or pending in the printer.
 Printer Restart
Power Cycle: Allows you to turn off and restart the printer.
Settings tab
Set and maintain various options on your product including power management, date and
time, security, printing, and paper settings, email alerts, default copy settings, restore
factory defaults and firewall settings.
HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for efficiently managing a wide
variety of networked HP devices, including printers, multifunction products, and digital
senders. This single solution allows you to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot,
and secure your printing and imaging environment — ultimately increasing business
productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin updates are periodically made available to provide support for specific
product features. Visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin and click the Self Help and
Documentation link to learn more about updates.
Security features overview

This product supports security standards and protocols that help secure the product,
protect information on your network, and simplify monitoring and maintenance of the
product.
For information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/
Secureprinting. The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security
features and may include information about additional security features that are not
contained in this document.
 Assign an administrator password in HP EWS

 Control Panel Lock
 Disable unused protocols and services
 Color Access Control
 Protected Protocols — HTTPS
 Firewall
 Syslog
 Certificates
 Signed Firmware
 Wireless Authentication

 The HP Embedded Web Server allows you to assign an administrator password so
that unauthorized users cannot change product configuration settings in the
HP Embedded Web Server. When the admin password is assigned and applied,
you must enter the password to make any configuration changes that are done
through the HP Embedded Web Server. If you change an existing password, you
must first enter that password. You can also remove the password by entering the
existing password and then deleting the assigned password.

 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to lock certain features on the
product’s control panel to prevent unauthorized use. Once the control panel lock is
enabled, certain control panel configuration features cannot be changed from the
control panel. The control panel lock setting itself can also be secured. This is
accomplished by setting the HP Embedded Web Server administrator password.
Once the HP Embedded Web Server administrator password is set, the admin
password must be entered when accessing the control panel lock enable/disable
setting.
Disable unused protocols and services

The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to disable unused protocols and services.
These protocol and services settings can also be protected from being changed by setting
the EWS admin password.
The protocols and services include the following:
 IPv4 and IPv6 disable/enable: To operate properly on a TCP/IP network, the

product must be configured with valid TCP/IP network configuration settings,
such as an IP address that is valid for your network. This product supports
two versions of this protocol: version 4 (IPv4) and version 6 (IPv6). IPv4 and
IPv6 can be enabled/disable individually or simultaneously enabled.
 Bonjour disable/enable: Bonjour services are typically used on small
networks for IP address and name resolution where conventional a DNS
server is not used. The Bonjour service can be enabled or disabled.
 SNMP disable/enable: SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is
used by network management applications for product management. This
product supports the SNMPv1 protocol on IP networks. This product allows
the ability to enable/disable SNMPv1.
 WINS disable/enable: If you have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) service on your network, the product automatically obtains its IP
address from that server and registers its name with any RFC 1001 and 1002-
compliant dynamic name services as long as the Windows Internet Name
Service (WINS) server IP address has been specified. The WINS server IP
address configuration can be enable or disabled. If enabled, then the primary
and secondary WINS server can be specified.
 SLP disable/enable: Service Location Protocol (SLP) is an Internet standard
network protocol that provides a framework to allow network applications to
discover the existence, location and configuration of networked services in
enterprise networks. This protocol can be enabled or disabled.
 LPD disable/enable: Line Printer Daemon (LPD) refers to the protocol and
programs associated with line-printer spooling services that may be installed
on various TCP/IP systems. LPD can be enabled or disabled.
 LLMNR disable/enable: Link-Local Multicast Name Resolution (LLMNR) is a
protocol based on the Domain Name System (DNS) packet format that allows
both IPv4 and IPv6 hosts to perform name resolution for hosts on the same
local link. LLMNR can be enabled or disabled.
 Port 9100 disable/enable: The product supports raw IP printing through TCP
Port 9100. This HP-propriety TCP/IP port on the product is the default port for
printing and it is accessed by HP software. Port 9100 can be enabled or
disabled.
 Web Services disable/enable: The product supports the ability to enable or
disable Microsoft Web Services Dynamic Discovery (WS Discovery) protocols
or Microsoft Web Services for Devices (WSD) Print services supported on the
product. These web services can be enabled or disabled together or WS
Discovery can be enabled separately.
 Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) disable/enable: Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP) is an Internet-standard protocol that allows you to print documents and
manage jobs over the internet. IPP can be disabled or enabled.
 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to enable and disable certain
product capabilities. These include network, Ethernet, wireless, wireless access
point (i.e. disables wireless direct capability), USB, fax, fax reprint, copy, digital
send, webscan, control panel lock, color fax, color copy, color print from memory
devices, all web services, only ePrint, and only Apps. The product must be turned
off, and then turned on again, for settings to take effect.

 HP’s suite of color access control tools allows you to enable or disable color by
individuals users or groups and applications. For more information see
www.hp.com/go/upd. The HP Embedded Web Server also allows you to disable
color faxing, color copying, and color print from memory devices.

 The HP Embedded Web Server features the ability to enable encryption of product
communication through the HTTPS redirection feature. When used, HTTPS
prevents others from viewing information between the EWS and the product via
encryption – providing a secure communication method.
 Firewall
 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to enable and configure product
firewall rules, priorities, templates, services and policies. The firewall feature
provides a network-layer of security on both IPv4 and IPv6 networks. The firewall
configuration capability provides control over IP addresses that are allowed access
the product, and the ability to set permissions and priorities for digital send,
management, discovery, and print services--providing a more secure way of
controlling access to the product.
 Syslog
 Support of Syslog, a standard protocol for logging status messages to a designated
server, can be used to track the activities and status of devices on the network. The
HP Embedded Web Service provides the ability to enable Syslog and to specify the
server to which the status messages will be sent. Specifying the priority of those
status messages is also supported.
 Certificates
 The HP Embedded Web Server provides the ability to install and manage
certificates for the authentication of product, server and network. This includes the
ability to create a certificate, install a certificate, and import and export certificates.
 Signed Firmware
 Support of digitally-signed firmware updates eliminates exposure to malicious
software by preventing the installation of non-approved firmware on the product.
 The HP Embedded Web Server provides the ability to configure wireless
networking via such 802.1x wireless enterprise authentication protocols as EAP-
TLS, LEAP, and PEAP to support access control. The HP Embedded Web Server
also provides the ability to configure wireless dynamic key encryption such as WEP
encryption and WPA-PSK authentication. In addition, Wireless Direct Authentication
can be enabled or disabled.
Economy settings
 General Office mode
General Office print mode uses less ink, which can extend the life of the ink
cartridges.
 Power Handling
The product includes power handling features that can help reduce energy
consumption.
The Standby and Sleep After Standby modes reduce power consumption
when the product has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the
length of time before the product enters Standby or Sleep After Standby
modes.
The Schedule On/Off feature turns the product on or off after a certain length
of time. You can adjust this time-delay setting.
CSR parts overview

CSR parts and supplies are designated as Mandatory or Optional.
 Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers,

unless the customer is willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the
repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not provided
under the HP product warranty.
 Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service
personnel at the request of the customer for no additional charge during the
product warranty period.
The part information in this table applies to both the HP Officejet Pro X451 and
X551 and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576.
Description Self-replacement options Part number
Left door Mandatory CN598-67001
Left door
Mandatory CN598-67002
straps
Output bin flap Mandatory CN598-67006
The part information in this table applies only to the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576.
Document
Feeder
CSR parts replacement overview

This section contains procedures to replace customer self-repair parts available for
the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576. If the
replacement procedure for a part is not in this section, complete removal and replacement
instructions are available for reference in the product Service Manual.
Click the Next Topic arrow ► to view step-by-step instructions for replacing CSR parts.
Use the contents menu to view specific videos or jump to the Maintenance and clearing
jams section.
The list of CSR parts, installation guides, and the videos shown in this section are available
to customers on the product support page and www.hp.com/support.
Left door replacement

The left door is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the left door.
1. Turn off the product.

2. Disconnect the power cable.
3. Lower the left door.
4. Remove the duplex module.
5. Unhook each restraining strap by rotating the bottom half of the strap to the
outside of the door.
6. Underneath the rear door hinge, locate the catch lever close to the edge of the
product.
7. While pushing the catch lever to the rear of the product, rotate the door to the
right, and then remove the door.
8. Reverse the steps above to install the new assembly.
Left door straps

The left door straps are mandatory CSR parts.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the left door straps.

6. Remove the straps from the mounting pins in the product chassis.
Output bin flap

The output bin flap is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow below for instructions on removing and replacing the output bin flap.
3. Remove the output bin.
4. Flex the middle of the output bin flap, and then remove the flap.
NOTE: The front (or left) pin of the output flap should be removed last, and
inserted first.
Document Feeder
The document feeder is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the document feeder.

3. Lift the document feeder assembly (which also functions as the flatbed scanner
lid).
4. Lift the left hinge.
5. While holding the document feeder, use a screwdriver to remove the document
feeder connector cover.
6. Use a screwdriver to disconnect the cable connector
7. Tilt the assembly toward the front of the product, and then lift the document
feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: The posts on the document feeder are stiff and require some effort
to remove from the product.
9. Accessories and Supplies overview
Part
Item Description
number
Standard-capacity black ink cartridge with

Ink cartridges CN621A
HP Officejet pigment ink
High-capacity black ink cartridge with

CN625A
CN622A Standard-capacity cyan ink cartridge with

Part
Item Description
number
High-capacity cyan ink cartridge with

CN626A
Standard-capacity yellow ink cartridge with

CN624A
High-capacity yellow ink cartridge with

CN628A
Standard-capacity magenta ink cartridge with

CN623A
High-capacity magenta ink cartridge with

CN627A
Paper handling
CN595A 500-sheet paper feeder (optional Tray 3)
accessories
USB cable 8121-0868 2-meter A-to-B cable
Advanced CN459–
Advanced cleaning kit
maintenance kits 67006
CN598–
Sled service kit
67021
Replacing the ink cartridges

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how to replace an ink cartridge.
1. Open the ink cartridge door.

2. Push the old ink cartridge inward to unlock it.
3. Grasp the edge of the old ink cartridge and then pull the cartridge straight
out to remove it.
4. Insert the new ink cartridge into the product.
5. Close the ink cartridge door.
6. Place the old ink cartridge in the new ink cartridge box and refer to HP's
recycling instructions at http://www.hp.com/r
Use the following procedure to clean the scanner:

3. Open the scanner lid.
4. Clean the scanner glass, the document feeder strips, and the white plastic
backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive
glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl
alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can
damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen.
They might seep and damage the product.
5. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to
prevent spotting.
6. Close the scanner lid.
7. Connect the power cable, and then turn on the product.
Clean the document feeder

Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad if the document feeder does
not correctly pick up pages.
Use the following procedure to clean the document feeder:
1. Open the document-feeder cover.

2. Use a moist, lint-free cloth to wipe both pickup rollers and the separation pad to
remove dirt.
3. Close the document-feeder cover.
Clean the printhead

During the printing process, paper, ink, and dust particles can accumulate inside the
product. Over time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as ink specks or
smearing. This product has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of
problems.
Use the following procedure to clean the printhead from the product control panel:

2. Touch the Tools menu.
3. Touch the Clean Printhead button.
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.
5. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the
process is completed.
Clean the touchscreen

Clean the touch screen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the
touch screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not
pour or spray water directly onto the touch screen.
Clearing jams overview

Jams can occur in the following locations in both the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551
Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series products:
1 Output bin
2 Left door
3 Optional Tray 3 and left jam-access door
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2
Clear jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how to clear a jam from Tray 1.
1. If the jammed sheet is visible and easily accessible in Tray 1, pull it from Tray 1.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all of the fragments are removed
before you resume printing.
2. The jammed sheet may also be accessible by removing Tray 2 and removing
the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product.
3. If the jammed sheet is not visible or easily accessible in Tray 1, open the left
door to access the jammed sheet.
4. If the paper is still not visible or accessible, remove the duplexer by pulling it out
with both hands. Set the duplexer aside, upright, on a piece of paper to prevent
ink spills.
CAUTION: When pulling out the duplexer, avoid making direct contact with
the black cylinder to prevent ink smear on skin or clothes.
5. Lower the platen by pressing down on the green tab. This will cause the product
to try to feed the sheet through the print zone. You may need to gently pull on
the sheet if it does not feed. Remove the sheet.
6. Lift the green tab to place the platen back into its operating position.
7. Reinstall the duplexer.
8. Close the left door.
Clear jams in Tray 2

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam from Tray 2.
1. Open Tray 2 by pulling it out and releasing the latch at the rear left of the tray.
2. Remove the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product.
3. Close Tray 2.
NOTE: To close the tray, push in the middle or with even pressure on both
sides. Avoid pushing on one side only.
Clear jams in optional Tray 3

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam from optional Tray 3.
1. Open Tray 3.
3. If the jam cannot be cleared at the tray, try clearing the jam from the Tray 3 left
door.
4. Close Tray 3.
Clear jams in the left door

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the left door.
1. Open the left door.

2. Gently remove any visible paper from the rollers and delivery area.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all fragments are removed before
you resume printing. Do not use sharp objects to remove fragments.
Clear jams in the output bin

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the output bin.
1. Look for jammed paper in the output bin area.

2. Remove any visible media.
resuming printing.
3. Open and then close the left door to clear the message.
Clear jams in the duplexer

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the duplexer.

2. If you can see the trailing edge of the sheet, remove the sheet from the product.
3. If the paper is not visible or accessible, remove the duplexer by pulling it out
ink spills.
Clearing jams in the document feeder HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series only
Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the document feeder.
1. Turn the product off.

2. Open the document feeder cover.
3. Press the green tab to lift the document feeder roller assembly, and gently pull
the jammed paper out.
4. Close the document feeder cover.
5. Open the scanner lid. If paper is jammed behind the white plastic backing,
gently pull it out.
Support
 Identify the available support and troubleshooting resources.

 Understand the basic theory of operation.
 Troubleshoot the major product components.
Additional resources include:
 Product Service Manuals

 Troubleshooting Guides
 www.hp.com/support
Select the appropriate country/region, select Troubleshooting, and then

enter the product number for guided troubleshooting, videos, and additional
information. The content on www.hp.com/support is available to customers.
 Grow@HP
Search Grow@HP for:
o Additional resources for both products.
o HP ePrint training material.
o Information about additional related products and features.
Theory of operation overview

This section of the course provides an overview of the overall theory of operation of the
products. Systems and processes that are similar to other HP Officejet products are not
included in the course. See the product Service Manual for more information.
Theory of operation topics:
 Service-level walkaround
 Basic operation
 System control
 Print subsystem
 Paper-handling system
 Servicing system
 Transmission system
 Aerosol management system
 Document feeder
 Scanner
 Fax functions and operation
See the product Service Manual for additional information.
Document feeder and scanner assembly (HP Officejet Pro X476 and
X576 only)
Re Description Part number Qty
f
1 Scanner assembly CN460-67009 1
2 Document feeder assembly CN598-67008 1
Covers, panels and doors (X451 and X551 Series models)
Ref Description Part number Qty
1 Rear cover CN598-67047 1
2 Eject flap assembly CN598-67023 1
3 Output bin CN598-67007 1
4 Right cover CN598-67051 1
5 Front cover CN598-67052 1
6 Left door CN598-67001 1
7 Left front cover CN598-67050 1
8 Left rear cover CN598-67049 1
9 Control panel assembly—X551 CN461-67003 1

10 Top cover—X551 CV037-67003 1
10 Top cover—X451 CN459-67007 1
11 Strap, left door CN598-67002 1
12 Strap, left door, rear CN598-67003 1
13 Hinge, ISS door CN598-67053 2
Covers, panels, and doors (X476 and X576 Series models)

f
CN598-
1 Rear cover 1
67047
CN598-
2 Eject flap assembly 1
67023
CN598-
3 Output bin 1
67007
CN598-
4 Right cover 1
67051
f
CN598-
5 Front cover 1
67052
CN598-
6 Left door 1
67001
CN598-
7 Left front cover 1
67050
CN598-
8 Left rear cover 1
67049
CN460-
9 Control panel assembly—non-wireless models 1
67005
CN461-
9 Control panel assembly—wireless models 1
67003
CN460-
10 Top cover 1
67010
CN598-
11 Strap, left door 1
67002
CN598-
12 Strap, left door, rear 1
67003
CN598-
13 Hinge, ISS door 2
67053
Internal assemblies (1 of 3)
1 Upper hanger assembly Not supported 1
2 Vertical star wheel wall Not supported 1
3 Aerosol fan assembly CN598-67046 1
4 Eject drive gear module CN598-67022 1
Not shown Flap actuator solenoid CN598-67022 1
Not shown Rack-eject lifter flap CN598-67022 1
5 Duplex drive module CN598-67036 1
6 Floor eject assembly Not supported 1
7 Power supply CN598-67016 1
7 Power supply—India and China only CN598-67017 1
9 Cross brace, right Not supported 1
10 Web advance rack assembly CN598-67021 1
11 Service sled assembly CN598-67021 1

12 Media presence sensor PCA/flag CN598-67034 1
13 REDI sensors CN598-67038 3
Not shown BDD sensor CN598-67035 1
Not shown FFC, 11 pin printzone CN598-67039 1
Not shown FFC, 24 pin printbar lift CN598-67040 1
Not shown FFC, 10 pin pick drive enc CN598-67041 1
Not shown FFC, 12 pin REDI distribution CN598-67042 1
Not shown FFC, 5 pin sensor carriage BDD CN598-67043 1
Not shown FFC, 3xFFC, printbar bundle kit CN598-67044 1
1 Transfer 3 shaft Not supported 1
2 Output upper 4 shaft Not supported 1
3 Output eject 5 shaft Not supported 1

5 Output lower 2 shaft Not supported 1
6 Gear, shaft output lower Not supported 1
CN598-
7 Gear, output idler gear, 83t/30t 1
67031
CN598-
8 Gear, idler gear train, 78t/48t 2
67031
9 Spurgear, idler gear train, 52t Not supported 1
10 Platen output 1 shaft Not supported 1
11 Gear, shaft output platen 1 Not supported 1
Ref Description Part Qty

number
Platen
1 CN598-
NOTE: The platen kit contains a TOF REDI 1
67025
sensor and a print zone REDI sensor.
Not
2 Encoder disk 1
supported
number
CN598-
3 Feedshaft Encoder PCA 1
67030
Not
4 Feedshaft 1
supported
CN598-
5 Drying path gear assembly 1
67060
CN598-
6 Tray lift transmission assembly 1
67020
CN598-
7 Separator/pick assembly kit 1
67018
CN598-
8 Printbar 1
67045
Not CN598-
Printbar lift mechanism assembly 1
shown 67027
CN598-
9 Separation assembly 1
67018
CN598-
10 Power button assembly 1
67019
CN598-
11 Duplex presence sensor PCA 1
67057
CN598-
12 Duplex module 1
67004
CN598-
13 Z stop, printbar lift rod 2
67048
number
Not CN598-
Shaft, printbar lift, clutched 1
shown 67028
PCA locations (front view)

f
1 Eject flap opto PCA CN598-67023 1
2 Pick encoder distribution PCA CN598-67029 1
3 Print zone distribution PCA CN598-67033 1
4 Feedshaft encoder PCA CN598-67030 1
5 Duplex presence sensor PCA CN598-67057 1
6 Power button assembly CN598-67019 1
7 REDI distribution PCA, CN598-67037 1
PCA locations (rear view)
1 Sensor carriage PCA/encoder strip CN598-67061 1

2 Media presence flag/opto PCA kit CN598-67034 1
3 Main PCA (X451dn models) CN463-67002 1
3 Main PCA (X451dw models) CN463-67004 1
3 Main PCA (X551dw models) CV037-67001 1
3 Main PCA (X576 models) CN598-67054 1
4 Tray 3 interconnect PCA CN598-67059 1
5 Fax PCA CN460-67007 1
6 Temperature sensor CN598-67024 1
7 Wireless PCA CN598-67055 1
Not
Control panel FFC (X451 models) CN463–67003 1
shown
Not
Control panel FFC (X551 models) CV037-67002 1
shown
Not Control panel FFC (X476 and X576 models) CN460-67008 1

shown
Basic operation overview

The following elements influence the product architecture:
 The first is the need to orient the printbar with its active face downwards and
statically located above the print media. This requires the printbar to move
vertically to access its active face.
 The second is producing face-down output. Rather than ejecting the page
face-up immediately after the ink is applied, the printed page is routed up and
back over the printbar to eject face-down.
Main components
Series are similar products except that the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series has a document feeder, scanner, and fax capability and the HP Officejet Pro X451
and X551 Series does not.
Main Components
 Control panel
 Output bin
 Optical scan carriage
 Printbar
 Service sled
 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1)
 Duplex module
 Main input tray (Tray 2)
 Optional tray (Tray 3)
HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 only
 Document feeder
 Scanner
Operation sequence overview

The engine-control system on the formatter PCA controls the operational sequences
The following sequence of operation occurs, from when the product is turned on
until the motor stops rotating:
 Initial startup and calibration
 Servicing operations
 Print preparation
 Print
 End of print job
 Standby
Initial startup and calibration

The initial startup and calibration prepares the product to print for the first time. It is
performed when the product is set up for the first time from the factory.
Initial startup and calibration:
 System flush: Flushes the shipping and handling fluid out of the printbar and
replaces it with ink.
 Die alignment: Aligns the 10 die on the printbar active face.
 Die density leveling: Measures and compensates for the drop variation.
Servicing
Servicing operations maintain the print quality by ensuring debris and excess ink are
removed and missing nozzles are replaced. Servicing operations are performed when the
printbar is entering the capping state after printing, leaving capping state after a print job is
initiated, or during extended print jobs.
Servicing operations:
 Nozzle presence detection: The optical scan carriage detects and disables
inoperable nozzles, and replaces them with operable nozzles.
 Printbar servicing:The web wipe on the service sled moves under the
printbar to clean the active face and fire the nozzles into the maintenance ink
module to clear clogs.
Print preparation
Print preparation occurs from the time the product receives a product command until the
paper enters the print zone.
Print preparation operations:
 The printbar leaves the capping state as the service sled moves away from
the printbar.
 If needed, some servicing occurs.
 The printbar lowers to the printing position. The media type and printing mode
determine the print zone height.
 The product picks media from one of the input trays.
 Every page from Tray 1 is scanned. For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, the
product performs media edge detection after printing the first sheet after the
main or optional tray is loaded. The last sheet of each job is also scanned if at
least five sheets have been printed.
 The product monitors environmental conditions. The product can slow the
print speed if conditions are significantly different than a normal office
environment (23° C (73.4° F), 50% relative humidity).
 The formatter PCA processes print data and transmits the data to the printbar.
Printing
Print operations occur from the end of the preparation period until the last sheet is
delivered. The printing process can be interrupted by occasional nozzle presence detection
and servicing events if the job includes many pages.
Print operations:
 As the page travels through the print zone, the printbar applies ink to the
page.
 Simplex print job–the page moves up, over the printbar, and out to the output
bin (face-down).
 Duplex print job–the page moves up until the trailing edge is 40 mm (1.5
inches) past the star-wheel jam reflective sensor, then it reverses direction
down through the duplex path underneath the maintenance ink module, and
then it reenters the print zone where the printbar applies ink to the second
side.
 The process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed.
End of print job

End of print job operations are performed after the print job is completed, and continue until
the next job is initiated. These operations put the product in a state where it’s ready for the
next print job.
End of print job operations:

 The printbar moves to the capping position after a short dwell interval.
 The service sled moves to cap the printbar.
Standby
During standby, the product is sitting idle, waiting for the next print job to be initiated. This
period is intended to conserve energy when the product is sitting idle. Certain functions
might be disabled to save power, and re-started only when needed.
The product has the following sleep modes:
 Idle mode—The printbar is capped and the product is ready to immediately

start a new job.
 Sleep1 mode—After the product is inactive for about 10 minutes (a setting
that can be adjusted from the control panel), the control panel dims and the
power LED blinks to indicate the unit is in Sleep1. All product functions are
available.
 Sleep2 mode—After the product is inactive for a longer period of time
(typically 2 hours, a setting that can be adjusted from the control panel), the
engine controller powers down to minimize power consumption.
System Control overview
The system control coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the
formatter. The engine PCA integrates both formatter and engine control electronics onto a
single assembly. The wireless radio unit (wireless models only) plugs into the back of the
engine PCA, and the fax connects via a short flat-flexible cable (FFC).
The system consists of five major sections:
 Formatter
 Data path
 Engine control
 Pen interface
 Power supply
Formatter and data path

The formatter controller ASIC controls the input/output (I/O) control, the user interface, and
the rendering of page description language files into product-specific commands.
Input/output (I/O) control
 The product supports 10/100 Ethernet, 802.11 wireless (wireless models), a

rear USB host port, a control panel USB host port, and analog fax port.
 For Ethernet networks, the formatter ASIC uses a separate integrated circuit
(Broadcom 5241) to provide the physical network layer.
 The formatter ASIC controls the USB device and USB host as well.
 Wireless I/O is provided via a separate radio module.
User interface
 The product contains a 4.3-in color graphics display.

 For wireless models, there is an additional LED to denote that the wireless
feature is enabled.
 The control panel includes a USB host port for connection to thumb drives.
Formatter digital ASIC
 Has dual ARM CPUs (792 MHz and 528 MHz) that execute firmware code
that provides high-level device control.
 Uses a standard PCle interface to pass data to the engine control ASIC.
Formatter analog ASIC
 Generates the system voltage for the formatter.

 Drives the scanner and Document feeder motors.
 Manages the real-time clock.
 Drives the fax speaker.
 The engine uses this ASIC to drive the ISS pumps, solenoids, and aerosol
fan.
Real-time clock
 Allows the fax module to time-stamp outgoing faxes.

 Determines the elapsed time between printhead and ISS calibration events.
 Uses a special block inside the engine analog ASIC, along with a crystal and
a battery.
Engine Control overview

The engine PCA hosts the following:
 Engine controller digital ASIC—Controls motors, system sensors, and the

printbar
 Engine controller analog ASIC—Integrates motor drivers, voltage
regulators, sensor interfaces, and supervisory circuits.
 Additional PCAs—interface to sensors and other subsystem components.
NOTE: In some cases, circuitry is located on a smaller remote PCA (SLB) to optimize cable
interconnects.
Engine controller digital ASIC

The engine controller digital ASIC has a high-performance 480 MHz ARM CPU and DSP
co-processors that execute firmware code to provide low-level engine control.
It also drives the printbar via 15 highspeed LVDS transmission lines, which are routed from
the engine PCA to the printbar via two large FFC cables.
The engine controller digital ASIC receives pre-rendered data from the formatter digital
ASIC over a standard PCle interface.
In some product sleep modes, the digital ASIC powers down. If a print job is received while
the product is in this mode, power resumes to the digital ASIC, which then must “boot up”.
This can take approximately 15 seconds, which will delay the first page out (FPO) time
accordingly. This sleep mode typically begins after two hours of product inactivity, although
the user can change this setting.
Engine controller analog ASIC

The engine uses two analog ASICs to generate the system voltages for the engine, drive
the engine motors, control various engine sensors, and monitor printbar power delivery for
correct operation.
Each one is a DC motor with encoder feedback, to provide precision servo control. These
motors are driven directly by one of the engine analog ASICs. Small DC motors also are
used to drive the ISS pump and the aerosol fan. There are solenoids that actuate the
ejection flap and the ISS priming system.
The product uses many sensors to track the media as it travels through the paper path.
Most of these are optical REDI sensors, which are used in conjunction with mirrors to
sense the presence or absence of paper in a particular location. These are carefully aligned
and calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.
The engine has seven motors, some of which are shared with other subsystems:
 Pick motor
 Feed motor
 Duplex motor
 Lift motor
 Eject motor
 Sensor carriage motor
 Aerosol fan motor
Additional printed circuit-board assemblies (PCAs)

PCA circuits that interface to sensors:
 Humidity sensor—The humidity sensor causes the product to adjust printing

speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal humidity range. This
sensor is calibrated at the factory to ensure maximum accuracy.
 Temperature sensor—The temperature sensor causes the product to adjust
printing speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal temperature
range. In some products, this sensor resides on a separate, remote PCA.
 Main tray presence sensor—The hall-effect sensor that detects if the main
tray is properly engaged resides on the back of the engine PCA. A small
magnet on the back of the main tray actuates the sensor. If the tray is fully
engaged, the magnetic field strength is sufficient to trigger the sensor.
PCA circuits that interface to subsystem components:
 Front USB PCA—Governs the control panel USB port.

 Fax PCA—Governs the product fax module.
 Duplex module presence sensor—A hall-effect sensor that detects that the
duplex module is properly seated.
 Power button PCA—Includes the power button and power LED, and
interface cables to the duplex module presence sensor and the MP tray
empty REDI sensor.
 Accessory tray interconnect PCA—Provides communication to optional
Tray 3.
 Pick encoder distribution PCA—Includes the pick motor encoder and the
pick motor interconnect cable.
 Eject encoder distribution PCA—Includes the eject motor encoder, plus the
interconnect cables to the eject motor and the aerosol fan.
 Print zone distribution PCA—Joins interconnect cables to the following
sensors: separator REDI, feed motion encoder, main tray empty sensor, Top
of Form (TOF) REDI sensor, and the Print zone REDI sensor.
 REDI distribution PCA—Includes hall-effect sensors that detect ink cartridge
door and left door positions. It also combines the interconnect cables for the
Eject REDI sensor, the Upper paper path REDI sensor, the Lower paper path
REDI sensor, and the eject flap opto flag sensor.
 Sensor carriage PCA—Includes a carriage motion encoder, a ZIM sensor,
and the BDD sensor.
 Printbar lift encoder distribution PCA—Includes the printbar lift motion
encoder, and combines interconnect cables to the printbar lift motor, carriage
motor, and eject flap solenoid.
 Duplex encoder PCA—Contains the motion encoder for the duplex motor.
 SHAID PCA—Contains interfaces to the out-of-ink sensors for the ink
cartridges, and combines the interface cables to the acumen PCA, the ISS
pump, and the ISS solenoids
 Acumen PCA—Contains interfaces to the acumen memory devices for the
ink cartridges.
 Pen interface (I/F)

 The conventional approach is to print a page in horizontal swaths by moving a
“scanning” printhead horizontally over a fixed sheet of paper, advancing the paper a
fixed amount, and then printing the next swath. With this product, the paper moves
underneath a fixed page-wide printhead in a single smooth motion. The single pass
page-wide printing used in this product requires that data and power be delivered to
the printbar at a very high rate, while also maintaining good control of paper
position as it moves past the printhead nozzles.
 The engine PCA sends power and data to the printbar through two large flat flexible
cables (36 and 38 pins). The printbar PCA routes power and data to 10 printhead
die, which are attached to the PCA using a flexible tab circuit and wire-bonding
process.
 There are also electronics to control the ink supply station (ISS). The SHAID PCA
detects low-ink conditions. It gauges ink levels by means of electrically sensing the
presence of ink and/or ink foam in the X-chamber. The SHAID PCA also collects
and distributes electrical signals that drive the push-prime pump(s), engage the
solenoids, and read the ink supply acumen data. All are routed through a single 17-
pin FFC from the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA.
 Each ink supply has a memory tag that stores information about the type of ink, the
amount of ink remaining, and other critical data. It uses a special authentication
scheme to ensure that only genuine HP supplies are used and the product is not
damaged by using invalid supplies. Acumen uses a two line serial bus, which, along
with 3.3 V and ground, is cabled through the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA and
the engine control digital ASIC.
Power supply
The power supply module converts 100-240 VAC to 33 VDC to power the system. The
power supply module has a sleep mode that reduces power consumption in system low-
power modes. When in its sleep mode, the power supply generates approximately 12 V.
The power supply module supplies 33 V to the engine PCA.
The power supply module has two operating modes, depending upon the state of its
nSLEEP input pin:
 Normal mode: Vo = 33 V (nSLEEP = high logic level)

 Sleep mode: Vo = 12 V (nSLEEP = low logic level)
The power supply is a self-contained module that can be replaced if it is determined to be

defective.
To ensure safe operation, the power supply will “latch off” if a persistent over-current fault
condition exists. This would typically be caused by a short-circuit from 33 V to ground in the
product. In addition, less severe faults can cause the power supply to latch off, if present for
an extended period of time, or if the product is operated above the recommended operating
range.
NOTE: In some countries/regions, the product is equipped with a high-voltage power
supply in order to prevent power supply unit failures due to over-voltage conditions.
Print subsystem overview

This section covers print system components and operational states.
Print subsystem components
Print Subsystem Components
 Printbar
 Printbar lift
 Ink cartridges
Printbar
The printbar’s fundamental purpose is to convert the digital firing instructions from the
product electronics into properly formed and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.
The printbar spans the full width of a letter/A4-size sheet (216 mm (8.5 in), which allows the
printbar to be statically positioned within the product and have the media move underneath
it, printing the entire page in a single motion
Printbar components
Item Description
1 Ink cartridge connections
2 Thermal inkjet (TIJ) die array
3 Data/power flow and regulation
4 Inkflow channels and pressure regulation
The printbar has a fixed array of 10 thermal inkjet (TIJ) die oriented in two staggered rows.
Each die contains more than 1,000 nozzles for each of the four ink colors (black (K), cyan
(C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y)). Behind the die array are the ink flow channels and
pressure regulation mechanisms that supply the die array with ink at the proper pressure
and flow. The die must also be fed power and data at the appropriate levels and rates,
which is the function of the onboard electronic circuitry. Finally, situated at the top of the
printbar, there are four ink cartridge receptacles, one for each color. These cartridges are
linked by flow connections to the rest of the printbar and supply the ink necessary for its
operation.
A sensor technology called back-scatter drop detect (BDD) monitors printbar health and
calibrations. This system looks at the reflection of the miniscule drops in flight, and then
passes these signals through high-speed, high-gain, bandpass filters. A complex artificial
intelligence (AI) system decides which drop ejectors are currently out of specifications, and
which are not.
After the AI system determines which drop ejectors are out of specification, the product
compensates for them. Some ejectors use neighboring nozzles and at times even tiny
amounts of other inks – whichever combination of methods necessary to deliver the best
print quality possible at that moment. In some cases, fully half of the nozzles can be “out”
without a noticeable degradation in quality. The compensation is done in real time with a
dedicated high-speed DSP. The system can scan portions of the system after print jobs,
but it is fully interruptible by new incoming print jobs.
Printbar air management system

The printbar uses a passive airgain management system. Air can enter the printbar
from the following sources:
 Die outgassing (from air in the ink)

 Air entering nozzles due to temperature / pressure variations
 Air entry through the printbar structure
 Air entry through the nozzles due to shipment vibration
Air that enters the printbar is warehoused. There is no mechanism to remove the air in the
field. Of the various mechanisms for air entry, the first three are generally benign, and
rarely cause issues during the expected life of the product. The fourth mechanism generally
occurs during shipment. New products are shipped with the printbar taped–which limits the
amount of air gained. If the printbar isn’t well restrained during shipment, then air gain can
be significant. If the product is shipped after removal of the printbar tape, airgain can be
reduced either by ensuring that the product stays on its base, or that the printbar is
restrained. Both would be best.
Printbar lift
The printbar lift is responsible for positioning the printbar it within the product and moving it
up and down as required. This vertical motion is both to establish proper spacing to the
paper during printing, and to raise it to either access the active face or perform necessary
calibrations.
During printing, the lift mechanism sets the printbar height and paper height depending on
the type of paper.
Optical scan carriage

The optical scan carriage has optical sensors used for calibration. Its motion is along the
long axis of the printbar. These sensors are used by a number of in-product calibration
features that are important for proper subsystem function. The BDD sensor is located on
the optical scan carriage.
Print system operation states overview

The print subsystem has the following distinct operational states:
 Startup
 Die alignment
 Die density leveling
 Nozzle presence detection
 Media edge position detection
 Servicing and capping
 Printing
 Startup
 As it comes from the factory, the printbar is initially filled with an inert ink-substitute
called Shipping and Handling Fluid (SHF). This fluid, essential for the manufacture
and transportation of the printbar, must be flushed and replaced with actual ink.
This is accomplished during the startup phase. The flushing process automatically
commences when ink supplies are inserted and the unit powered up for the first
time. The SHF is removed by sustained printbar operation and replaced by ink from
the supplies. The process terminates once all the SHF has been flushed from the
printbar.
 Special host supplies are supplied with the product prior to its first use. These
supplies contain additional ink so that the SHF can be replaced with ink, and there
will still be a 100 percent of ink level. These supplies can be used only to initialize
the product. You cannot use them in another product that has been initialized.
 NOTE: The initial startup time is noticeably longer than the following regular startup
times.
 Die alignment
 Since there are 10 die comprising the printbar active face, each with associated
positional tolerances, an active calibration must be performed to prevent errors and
allow a uniform ink application to the media (without any gaps or overlaps between
adjacent die). This die alignment is done by printing a special diagnostic image on a
sheet of paper and then scanning it with the optical scan carriage. Die alignment is
performed as part of initial unit startup, and can be performed manually as part of
the print quality recovery tool.

 There are also tolerances associated with the drops fired by the individual printbar
die. Another active calibration measures and compensates for these variations to
produce a visually uniform ink application to the media. Another set of diagnostic
images is printed and scanned by the optical scan carriage to achieve this die
density leveling. Die alignment and die density leveling are usually paired together.

 In printing, since all the ink is applied in a single smooth motion of the media past
the printbar, any inoperable nozzle can show up as a noticeable streak. The
operational state of each of the thousands of nozzles comprising the printbar is
periodically measured after a certain amount of printing. The printbar is raised by
the printbar lift, and the BDD assembly on the optical scan carriage watches for
drop presence as each nozzle is fired. Inoperable nozzles are turned off and other
operable nozzles employed on subsequent printed pages to apply the missing ink.
Nozzle presence detection can be interrupted by new incoming print jobs.

 The product employs a learning algorithm to define media center as a function of
input source– multipurpose tray, main tray, or accessory tray. The edge scan is
located downstream of the print zone. As media is scanned, the media center
database is updated. The image is registered to the page using the media center
database.

 When not in use, the printbar is normally in the capped state – the printbar is fully
raised, the service sled is positioned underneath, and the printbar cap engaged
against the printbar active face. Servicing– the cleaning of the active face and the
firing of the nozzles–can occur either during Sleep2 mode or after extended time in
storage. It can also occur during extended print jobs.
 Printing
 The printing state begins by the printbar leaving the capping state, and being
lowered to the printing position after the service sled moves out of the way.
Concurrently, a sheet of media is picked from one of the trays and the leading edge
staged at the entrance to the print zone. Once the print data has been processed
and is available for transmission to the printbar, the sheet is fed at a constant
velocity through the print zone and the ink applied by the printbar.
 In the case of one-sided printing the inked sheet is moved up, over and out to the
output tray. For two-sided printing the sheet is moved until its trailing edge is past
the merge to the vertical path and then it is reversed, through the duplex path
underneath the maintenance ink module, and reintroduced into the print zone for
inking of the second side.
 This process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed. If the print
job is large enough, it can be interrupted by servicing processes.
 Paper-handling system overview

 This section covers the product paper path, zones, and components.
 The paper-handling system moves paper through the product according to
commands from the formatter.
Paper-handling system paper path
Components of the paper path move the paper from the desired input tray to
a position underneath the printbar, and then deliver the printed result to the
output tray. It is the combined orientations and actions of the printbar, the
printbar lift, and the paper path that establish the print zone, which is the
precisely controlled region in which the ink drops move from the active face
of the printbar to the paper situated 1 to 2 mm beneath it.
Paper path zones overview
Paper path zones
1. Deskew buckle
2. Print zone
3. Duplex
4. Output
5. Eject
Deskew buckle
The deskew buckle is the area between the turn roller and feed roller, and all print job
paper passes through this zone. During the deskew operation, the duplex module/MP tray
motor rotates forward, driving the paper into the feed roller nip while the feed roller is not
moving. The Top of Form (TOF) REDI sensor determines the leading edge for accurate
deskew buckle size, jam detection, and if the tray successfully picked media.
Print zone
The print zone is the path between the feed roller and output pinch 1 roller. The feed roller,
which has an analog quadrature encoder, precisely controls the paper in the paper feed
direction. In the vertical direction, a combination of the platen, feed roller, and output pinch
roller 1 controls the paper. The user can rotate the platen down for jam access after
removing the duplex module.
There are no paper path sensors in the print zone. Therefore, if a jam occurs in the print
zone, it is not detected until the leading edge of the paper is determined to be “late” in
reaching the jam sensor in the output path.
When a user pulls on jammed media in the print zone that is still partially in the feed roller
nip, the servo control will detect a slight movement of the feed roller and assist the user by
applying a forward torque to the roller. Also, the motion control system will disengage the
duplex module rectifier (swing arm) so that the turn roller can spin freely. This feature
reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore reduces the chance of leaving
torn pieces of paper in the path–especially in the deskew buckle zone.
Duplex
By opening the left door, the duplex module can be removed to clear jams. The duplex
module also serves as a maintenance ink collection unit for the printbar and will expose the
user to maintenance ink when it is removed; therefore there are warnings on the module
not to touch certain areas.
When a user pulls on jammed media from the duplex module (or any of the trays) that is
partially in the feed roller nip, the servo control will detect a slight movement of the feed
roller and assist the user by applying a reverse torque to the feed roller and disengage.
Also, the motion control system will disengage the duplex module rectifier so the turn roller
can spin freely. This feature reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore
reduces the chance of leaving torn pieces of paper in the path – especially in the deskew
buckle zone.
To determine its presence, the duplex module has a magnet that triggers a hall effect
sensor mounted to the product chassis.
Output
The output path begins at output pinch roller 1 and continues to output pinch roller 5. There
are four REDI sensors in this path that detect leading and trailing edges and jams.
The feed motor drives the rollers in the output path, except output pinch roller 5. All the
pinch rollers in the output and exit path are star wheels to prevent roller tracking on
wet/damp ink. However, the turn roller pinch is solid and has a high amount of force for
deskew buckle formation. Also, the feed motor drives all output shafts except shafts 5 and
6.
The Lower paper path REDI, Upper paper path REDI, and Eject REDI sensor in the output
path all track the leading and trailing edges of paper.
The outer and top portions of the vertical path are formed by paper guides molded in and
attached to the left door. The left door can be opened for jam clearance and has a hall
effect sensor to determine if it is closed. Also when the left door is opened, drive rollers that
form pinches 3 and 4 disengage from the feed motor for safety purposes.
Eject
The eject portion of the paper path includes the zone from output pinch roller 5 to the eject
flap.
The eject motor powers output pinch roller 5 and eject pinch roller 6.
The eject flap has three positions:
 Closed—Not printing.
 Partially open—Heavy ink printing in dry environments, to limit severe curl.
 Fully open—All other printing. This position controls moderately curled
media.
The eject flap is opened and closed by a torque clutch on the eject roller shaft. The flap
also has a locking feature that is controlled by a solenoid. In order for the door to open all
the way, or move between positions, the solenoid must be actuated.
Paper path components overview

The paper path consists of the following major components:
 Two integrated input trays plus one optional accessory tray.

 Four motors and a solenoid plus two more motors in the accessory tray.
 Duplex module.
 Fourteen sensors plus four more sensors in the accessory tray.
 Multiple feed rollers, pinch rollers, star wheels, and media guides.
 Transmission components (gears, shafts, levers, swingarms) that interface
with other subsystems such as the printbar and service sled.
Sensors
Sensors
1. Output flap jam sensor

2. Ambient temperature sensor
3. Ambient humidity sensor
4. Tray 2 pickup tire home sensor
5. Tray 2 tray presence sensor
7. Tray 3 paper presence sensor
8. Tray 3 separation sensor
12. Tray 3 cleanout presence sensor
13. Top of Form (TOF) REDI sensor (located on platen)
Sensors
14. Feed roller encoder

15. Feed roller home sensor
16. Duplex module presence sensor
17. Print zone REDI sensor (located on platen)
18. Back-scatter drop detect sensor
19. Print calibration/Media edge detect sensor
20. Lower paper path REDI sensor
21. Left door open sensor
22. Upper paper path REDI sensor
23. Ink supply door open sensor
24. Eject REDI sensor
Motors
Paper-handling system motors
1. Eject (or output drive) motor

2. Tray 2 pickup motor
4. Duplex Tray 1 motor
5. Tray 3 feed motor
6. Feed motor
7. Optical carriage motor
8. Printbar lift motor
Input trays
The product comes standard with two input trays, and also accepts an accessory tray.
Tray 1—50-page multipurpose (MP) tray:
 Tray 1 shares a motor with the duplex module and has only one sensor.
 A reflective (REDI) sensor determines if media is present in the tray.
 The feed roller reflective REDI sensor determines if a sheet of media is
successfully picked from the tray.
Tray 2—500-sheet letter/A4 size main tray:
 Tray 2 has a pick motor, which is also moves the service sled.
 Similar to the accessory tray, both the main tray motor and the duplex MP tray
motor operate at the same time when picking paper from the main tray.
 A hall effect sensor determines if the tray is closed.
 A flag/opto sensor determines if there is media in the tray.
 A flag/opto sensor determines if the pick roller is in home position.
 The feed roller jam sensor is used to determine if a sheet of media is
successfully picked from the main tray.
Tray 3—Optional 500-sheet legal size accessory tray:
 Tray 3 has two motors, one for picking paper and one for the turn roller. This
roller receives paper from the pickup roller and transfers it to the multipurpose
tray ITR that is driven by the duplex module/MP tray motor.
 Both the accessory tray motor and the duplex module/MP tray motor operate
at the same time when picking paper out of the accessory tray
 A flag/opto sensor determines if the pickup roller is in the home position.
 A hall effect sensor determines if the left door is closed.
 A separation sensor determines if the product successfully picked media.
 Servicing system overview
Servicing system components
Service sled—Maintains print quality by wiping debris and ink off the print
nozzles.
Maintenance ink module—Where maintenance ink is deposited.
Service sled
The service sled system keeps the printbar nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the
product as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The service sled system uses the
pick drive system (a component of the paper path) for horizontal motion to perform its
functions.
Service sled system wiping and capping functions:
 Wiping function
The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and particulates.
To perform the wiping function, the product moves the service sled
underneath the printbar (which is elevated from the print position) so that the
Web fabric makes contact with the ink nozzles. The Web fabric works in the
form of a belt loop that advances after every wipe. Since the belt is a finite
loop, it will eventually reuse previously used material. The Web advances
when the Web wipe module moves to the right out of the print zone. The
advance mechanism is triggered by a mechanism located on the rear wall of
the unit.
 Capping function
The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage when the
product is idle.
To perform the capping function, the service sled moves underneath the
printbar (which is elevated from the print position), which allows the rubber
cap to seal the print nozzles from the environment.
Item Description
1 Service sled cap
2 Service sled wiping surface
3 Service sled Web fabric loop
4 Printbar support posts
Transmission system overview

The pick/service motor uses a multi-state transmission to power the following three
functions:
 Move the service sled

 Pick paper from the main tray
 Lift the main tray paper stack
The transmission has the following states:
 Service sled (forward/reverse)

 Pick (forward direction)/Tray Lift (reverse direction)
Printbar movement to a specific location releases the transmission lock, and enables the
pick/service motor to select the transmission state.
NOTE: The product will not function with the transmission in the main tray pick/main tray lift
state if the service station has been manually capped.
NOTE: Reusing caps or pushing the caps too far onto the printbar lift guide rods while
servicing the product can result in the transmission not shifting reliably.
Transmission system components
NOTE: The transmission components are behind the main PCA electronics and are difficult
to access.
Transmission system states
State 1—Main tray lift
 Link pivot arm and shift swing arm in locked position

 Upper swing arm down, engaged with lower swing arm
 Lower swing arm down, engaged with main tray lift transmission
 Printbar either up or down
State 1—Main tray pick

 Lower Swing arm up, engaged with pick shaft
State 1—Mid-switch
 Link pivot arm and shift swing arm in unlocked position

 Upper swing arm in mid switch position
 Printbar in middle position
State 2—Service Station

 Upper swing arm up, engaged with service sled drive shaft
 Aerosol management system overview

 The aerosol management system consists of a fan module and filter box to keep ink
aerosol from building up inside the product. The following figure shows the service
ink and aerosol capture system components.


 In between pages, printed aerosol is drawn though the platen openings. Service ink
travels directly through the platen, impacting and collecting on the spit roller.
Aerosol from the service spitting is also collected via the same system. Service ink
collects in the duplex module, and a porous filter element captures the aerosol as
aerosol-laden air passes though it. The aerosol blower mounted to the filter housing
creates the air motion (suction—lower pressure—in the print zone).
 Most of printbar servicing ink (maintenance ink) is captured by the spit roller and
scraped into the bottom of the bucket on the duplex module. The service ink spit
roller is indexed slowly by the motion of paper though the product, specifically
driven by the swingarm and turn-roller gear train, with power provided by the duplex
motor.
 The product purges the printbar of its shipping fluid at initial startup, and then
absorbers in the base of the duplex module collect the fluid. These absorbers allow
much of the initial water to evaporate from the shipping fluid over time. Also, they
allow service ink coming into contact with the absorbers to leach some of their
fluids into them, assisting with drying and thickening of the sludge.
 The blower remains active as long as the printbar is uncapped, and it continues to
operate for a few seconds after capping is complete.
Aerosol management system components
1. Blower
2. Aerosol filter housing
3. Duplex module/maintenance ink
module
4. Platen
Document feeder overview

The document feeder applies only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
The following sections describe document feeder capabilities of the product:
 Operation
 Paper path and sensors
 Jam detection
 Standby
 In standby mode (paper-loading mode), the pickup roller is up and the stack-stop is
down, preventing the user from inserting the original document too far. When a
document is inserted correctly, the paper-present sensor detects its presence
 Pick
 When the document feeder receives a copy or scan command, the document
feeder motor engages the gear train to lower the pickup-roller assembly and raise
the stack-stop. The first roller, called the pre-pick roller, moves the top few sheets
forward into the document feeder. The next roller is the pickup roller. This roller
contacts the document feeder separation pad, which separates multiple pages into
single sheets.
 Feed
 The single sheet continues through the path. Along the way, the form sensor, which
is a set distance from the document feeder glass, detects the sheet. This alerts the
scanner to start when the page reaches the glass. The scanner acquires the image,
one raster line at a time, until it detects the end of the page. The page is then
ejected. The pick and feed steps are repeated as long as paper is detected in the
document feeder input tray
 Duplex
 When the product duplexes from the document feeder, the paper passes through
the document feeder three times. During the second instance, the product reverses
the page orientation and then scans it. During the third instance, the product returns
the page to the original orientation.
 Lift
 When no more paper is detected in the document feeder input tray and the form
sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and the
motor turns in a sequence that lifts the pick-roller assembly to standby (paper-
loading) mode again.
 NOTE: The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is
open.
 NOTE: Lifting the scanner lid/document feeder from the glass during feeder
operation will result in a paper jam error.
 Document feeder paper path and sensors

 The following diagram shows the document feeder paper path during a two-sided
(duplexed) copy job. The paper enters the product from the document feeder input
tray and passes through the paper path for the first time. The product then pulls the
paper back through the path in order to reorient the page and scan the second side.
The paper then travels back to the end of the paper path, where it is pulled in one
more time to travel through the paper path in order for the product to reorient the
page again before sending it out of the paper path and pulling in the next sheet.


 The paper-present sensor determines if paper is in the document feeder input tray.
The form sensor detects the top and bottom edges of the document. One other
sensor detects an open document feeder cover.
Document feeder jam detection

The document feeder has two sensors that detect paper. The paper-present sensor detects
the presence of media in the document feeder input tray. The form sensor detects media
moving through the document feeder. If a jam is detected, the document feeder
immediately stops the paper feeding, initiates a jam clearing routine and a jam message
appears on the control-panel display.
A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions:
 Document-feeder jam: When documents are detected in the document

feeder input tray, and a command to copy, scan or fax is received, the
document feeder attempts three times, or for about 10 seconds, to advance
the paper to the form sensor. If the paper does not advance, the scan module
turns off and the ADF Misfeed message appears on the control-panel
display.
 Long-document jam: If the paper has advanced to trigger the form sensor,
but the trailing edge is not detected within the time allowed for a 381 mm (15
in) document (the maximum allowable page length for the document feeder),
the scan module turns off and the Paper Jam message appears on the
control-panel display.
 Stall jam: When a page that is less than 381 mm (15 in) long has advanced
to the form sensor but has not left it within the expected time, the paper has
probably stalled or jammed. The scan module turns off and the Paper
Jam message appears on the control-panel display.
 Other: If the paper stops in the document feeder and the scan module
remains under the document feeder scanner glass, an internal firmware error
has probably occurred and the Cannot Scan, Copy, or Fax message
appears on the control panel display. This is usually remedied by cycling the
power.
Scanner system
This topic applies only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on the glass. The
scanner does this by illuminating the document with LEDs (red, green, and blue) and
capturing the image in the image sensor to create an electronic format of the document.
The flatbed scanner consists of the following three main elements:
 CIS scanner: The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image
using the product's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs sequentially
illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover
the entire page width. Because only one color is captured for each line per
exposure, the three colors are recombined electronically to create the full
color image. For monochromatic scans or copies, all three LEDs are
illuminated to create a white light for the scan so the raster line can be
captured in one exposure.
 Mechanical carriage drive: The carriage drive moves the CIS scan head
along the document length to create the image. In this product, a small DC
motor with an optical encoder creates this motion. The speed of the carriage
drive is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is much faster than 1200
ppi) and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are three-times
slower than monochromatic scans). A 1200 ppi color scan moves so slowly
that the product might appear to not be working, whereas a monochromatic
copy scan moves at 50 times that speed and will be somewhat noisy.
 Image processing system (formatter): The formatter processes the scanner
data into either a copy or a scan to the computer. For copies, the image data
is sent directly to the product without being transmitted to the computer.
Depending on user selections for the copy settings, the formatter enhances
the scanner data significantly before sending it to the product. Image data is
captured at 300 ppi for copies and is user selectable for scans to the
computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits for each of the three colors (256
levels for each color), for a total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).
Fax functions and operation overview

Fax functions apply only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
This section describes fax capabilities of the product:
 Security features
 PSTN operation
 Fax subsystem
 Fax card
 Fax page storage
Security features
The product can send and receive fax data over telephone lines that conform to public
switch telephone network (PSTN) standards. Secure fax protocols make it impossible for
computer viruses to be transferred from the telephone line to a computer or network.
The following product features prevent virus transmission:
 No direct connection exists between the fax line and any devices that are
connected to the USB or Ethernet ports.
 The internal firmware cannot be modified through the fax connection.
 All fax communications go through the fax subsystem, which does not use
Internet data-exchange protocols.
PSTN operation
The product generates and detects the signaling tones, currents, and data signals that are
required to transmit and receive faxes using the PSTN.
The following basic functions of PSTN operation are assumed in the design of the
fax subsystem:
 The PSTN operates through a central office (CO) that generates a constant
voltage on the TIP and RING wires (48 V, usually). A device goes off-hook by
connecting impedance (such as 600 ohms for the U.S.) across the TIP and
RING so that a line current can flow. The CO can detect this current and can
send impulses like dial tones. The product generates more signaling tones,
such as dialing digits, to tell the CO how to connect the call. The product can
also detect tones, such as a busy tone from the CO, that tell it how to behave.
 When the call is connected, the CO behaves like a piece of wire connecting
the sender and receiver. All fax signaling and data transfer occurs during this
period. When a call is completed, the circuit opens again and the line-current
flow ceases, removing the CO connection from both the sender and the
receiver.
 On most phone systems, the TIP and RING signals appear on pins 3 and 4 of
the RJ-11 modular jack (the one on the fax card, as defined in the common 6
wire RJ standard). These two signals do not have to be polarized because all
of the equipment works with either TIP or RING on one pin and the other
signal on the other pin. This means that cables of either polarity can
interconnect and still work.
 The fax subsystem

 The fax subsystem consists of the formatter, fax card, firmware, and software.
 It is designed to support V.34 fax transmission, medium speeds (such as V.17 fax),
and the lower speeds of older fax machines.
 Fax card overview

 The fax card contains the modem chipset (DSP and CODEC) that controls the
basic fax functions of tone generation and detection, along with channel control for
fax transmissions. The CODEC and its associated circuitry act as the third-
generation silicon data access arrangement (DAA) to comply with worldwide
regulatory requirements.
 Safety barrier
 The most important function of the fax card is the safety isolation between the high-
voltage, transientprone environment of the telephone network (TNV [telephone
network voltage]) and the low-voltage analog and digital circuitry of the formatter
(SELV [secondary extra-low voltage]). This safety isolation provides both customer
safety and product reliability in the telecom environment.
 Any signals that cross the isolation barrier do so magnetically. The breakdown
voltage rating of barrier critical components is greater than 5 kV.
 Protection circuitry
 In addition to the safety barrier, the fax card protects against over-voltage and over-
current events.
 Telephone over-voltage events can be either differential mode or common mode.
The event can be transient in nature (a lightning-induced surge or ESD) or
continuous (a power line crossed with a phone line). The fax card protection
circuitry provides margin against combinations of over-voltage and overcurrent
events.
 Common mode protection is provided by the selection of high-voltage-barrier critical
components (transformer and relay). The safety barrier of the fax card PCB traces
and the clearance between the fax card and surrounding components also
contribute to common mode protection.
 A voltage suppressor (a crowbar-type thyristor) provides differential protection. This
device becomes low impedance at approximately 300 V differential, and crowbars
to a low voltage.
 Data path
 TIP and RING are the two-wire paths for all signals from the telephone network. All
signaling and data information comes across them, including fax tones and fax
data.
 The telephone network uses DC current to determine the hook state of the
telephone, so line current must be present during a call. The silicon DAA provides a
DC holding circuit to keep the line current constant during a fax call.
 The silicon DAA converts the analog signal to a digital signal for DSP processing,
and also converts the digital signal to an analog signal for transmitting data through
a telephone line.
 The magnetically coupled signals that cross the isolation barrier go through a
transformer.
 The DSP in the fax card communicates with the ASIC in the formatter using the
high-speed serial interface.
 Ring detect
 Ring detect is performed by the line voltage monitoring module of the silicon DAA,
and is a combination of voltage levels and cadence (time on and time off). Both
must be present to detect a valid ring. The CODEC works with DSP as well as the
firmware to determine if an incoming signal is an answerable ring.
 Line current control

 The DC current from the CO needs to have a path to flow from TIP to RING. The
DC impedance emulation line modulator and DC terminations modules in the silicon
DAA act as a DC holding circuit, and work with the firmware to achieve the voltage-
current characteristic between TIP and RING. The impedance (the current-voltage
characteristic) changes corresponding to certain special events, such as pulse
dialing or when the product goes on-hook.

 Fax pages are the electronic images of the document page. They can be created in
any of three ways: scanned to be sent to another fax machine, generated to be sent
by the computer, or received from a fax machine to be printed.
 The product stores all fax pages in flash memory automatically. After these pages
are written into flash memory, they are stored until the pages are sent to another
fax machine, printed on the product, transmitted to the computer, or erased by the
user.
 These pages are stored in flash memory, which is the nonvolatile memory that can
be repeatedly read from, written to, and erased. The product has 2 MB of flash
memory, of which 1.5 MB is available for fax storage. The remaining 0.5 MB is used
for the file system and reclamation. Adding RAM does not affect the fax page
storage because the product does not use RAM for storing fax pages.
 Advantages of flash memory storage
 Fax pages that are stored in flash memory are persistent. They are not lost as a
result of a power failure, no matter how long the power is off. Users can reprint
faxes in case an ink cartridge runs out of ink or the product experiences other
errors while printing faxes.
 The product also has scan-ahead functionality that makes use of flash memory.
Scan-ahead automatically scans pages into flash memory before a fax job is sent.
This allows the sender to pick up the original document immediately after it is
scanned, eliminating the need to wait until the fax transmission is complete.
 Because fax pages are stored in flash memory rather than RAM, more RAM is
available to handle larger and more complicated copy and print jobs.
Troubleshooting overview
This section contains troubleshooting procedures that are available to customers along with
procedures that are intended for service and support personnel.
 Hidden menus and service modes

 Diagnostic tests
 Control panel messages
 Troubleshooting symptoms


Hidden menus and service modes overview

WARNING! Misuse of these menus and modes could damage the product or make it
unusable.
This section describes the following hidden menus and service modes used for
testing and calibration:
 Engineering menu
 Support menu
 Manufacturing (MFG) mode
 Audit mode
NOTE: MFG mode and Audit mode are ONLY to be used by authorized service providers.
They should NEVER be access by the end user.
Accessing the Engineering and Support menus

To access the Engineering menu:
1. Touch the Cancel button.
2. Touch the Back button.
3. Touch the Cancel button twice.
To access the Support menu:
3. Touch the Back button twice.
Placing the product in MFG mode

To place the product in MFG mode:
1. Press and hold the ATM1 and ATM2 buttons while plugging in the product.

2. Press the power button to enter MFG (on) mode.

unusable.
 Support menu
 Audit mode
They should NEVER be accessed by the end user.

1. Touch the Home button.
3. Touch the Home button twice to enter the Engineering menu.
NOTE: The Service menu is accessed from the Engineering menu.

 Touch the Back button four times consecutively to open the Support
menu.
NOTE: The Support menu is usually used by HP call center agents for assisting customers.

1. Press and hold the power button while plugging in the product. The HP logo
appears on the product control panel, and then disappears. Continue to hold
the power button for five seconds after the logo disappears.
2. Release the power button.
5. Touch the Home button twice.
6. After a new screen appears, touch the Home button again to enter

MFG (off) mode.
NOTE: MFG mode is ONLY to be used by authorized service providers. It should NEVER

be accessed by the end user.
Placing the product in Audit mode

WARNING! Audit mode is used only when the main PCA is replaced.
The product touchscreen is not active in this mode. Use the Home and Back
buttons on the control panel frame. These buttons are not illuminated until they are touched
with sufficient pressure. Locate these buttons by sweeping your finger over the general
areas.
To place the product in Audit mode:

7. Press the power button.
NOTE: Audit mode is ONLY to be used by authorized service providers. It should NEVER
Diagnostic tests overview

The following diagnostic tests are discussed in this section:
 Tap tests
 Print quality test
Performing a tap test

HP recommends the following tap tests:
 10 tap test—Out-of-box experience (OOBE) testing

 12 tap test—REDI sensor testing
 61 tap test—Alignment and color calibration testing
 909 tap test—BDD testing
To perform a tap test:
1. Open the Engineering Menu.

2. Touch Manufacturing Menu.
3. Use the arrow key to find the Reports Menu, and then touch OK.
4. Use the arrow key to find Print-mech tap tests, and then touch OK.
5. Use the arrow key to find the tap test number.
6. 10 Tap test—OOBE testing

7. OOBE tap test results are found on the printed tap test results page at line number
68. Line 68 is in the following format:
8. 68. Startup complete: 1 255 1 2 0 0 0 0
9. Use the following table to interpret these numbers:
Colum Code Acceptable values

n
A value of 1 indicates
that the printbar has been
started up. This means
that shipping fluid has
1 DSID_PEN_PRINTER_STARTUP_BITS been removed from the
printbar and replaced
with ink. This is the
expected state for a
printer after initialization.
2 DSID_OOBE_STATE 255–OOBE messaging

n
complete.
1–SHF purge is complete

DSID_INK_SUPPLY_OOBE_COMPELT
3 and service wipes have
E
been enabled.
A value of 2 means that

the OOBE printed
calibrations are complete.
A value of 1 means the
OOBE printed
calibrations are in
4 DSID_CAL_OOBE_STATE
progress.
OOBE printed calibration
does not exist so no
printing/calibration for
OOBE is attempted.

pen height and beam
center have been
completed, and that BDD
5 DSID_IQ_LIST_INDEX is scheduled (or pending)
to perform normally.
NOTE: For 1315FR
firmware and above.
6 DSID_BDD_FAIL_MASK 0–internal use only.
DSID_IDS_FIRST_CHARGE_REQUIRE
7 0–internal use only.
D
8 DSID_PRINTHEAD_CAL_NEEDED A value of 0 indicates

that OOBE calibrations
(not IQ calibrations) are
complete. This is so the
n
messaging is complete for

the calibrations. For
example, if this value is
0, but the
CAL_OOBE_STATE =1,
you will get the printed
OOBE calibrations, but
the control panel may
display Preparing instea
d of Calibrating.
10. NOTE: For future reference, this table can be found in the product troubleshooting
guide.
11. 12 Tap test—REDI sensor testing

12. Use the following table to interpret the REDI sensor tap test results:
Report area Item Acceptable values
Print Humidity Sensor

Stable Relative Humidity 0–100 RH.
Data
Pen TSR Ambient Pen TSR Ambient ± 10 °C of current

Temperature Estimate Temperature x10 °C ambient temperature.
Digital Temperature Digital Temperature Sensor

± 10 °C of current
Sensor Ambient Ambient Temperature x10
ambient temperature.
Temperature °C
Print REDI Sensor

TOF sensor, P value 1
Between 10 and 100.
Calibration Data
Print REDI Sensor

TOF sensor, M value 1
Between 25 and 380.
Calibration Data
1
“M” is a mirror result, “P” is blocked with paper.
guide.
14. 61 Tap test—Alignment and color calibration testing

15. NOTE: If you hold the up or down arrows down, the tap count will increment by 10,
or 100.
16. An acceptable 61 tap test has identical values for “Color scale (factory)” and “Color
scale (current)” parameters on the printed report areas. “Color scale (factory)” and
“Color scale (current)” will be identical after a main PCA replacement, but may not
be the same under other conditions. The values should also be identical after a
printbar replacement.
Tap test 909—BDD status testing

NOTE: If you hold the up or down arrows down, the tap count will increment by 10, or 100.
An acceptable 909 tap test has the following values:
 BDD is operating
 Cal OOBE is complete state = 2
 Cal IQ is in progress, index = 1
NOTE: For future reference, this information can be found in the product troubleshooting
guide.
Performing a print quality test

To diagnose print quality problems using the Print Quality Page:
1. Load the product with regular, unused white paper.
2. On the control panel, touch the Setup button.

3. Open the Print Reports menu.
4. Select Print Quality Report.
The Print Quality Page contains four bands of color, divided into the groups. By examining
each group, you can isolate a print quality problem to a particular ink cartridge.
In general, if the ink system is working correctly, all the color bars are present and not
streaked. Each bar has three distinct shades, but otherwise the color should not vary
across the bar. The bars should also be evenly lined up. The black text on the page should
not show ink streaks.
Print Quality defect examples

If dots or streaks appear in one or more groups, clean the printhead. If this does not solve
the problem, contact HP.
If streaks appear in multiple color bands, see if the problem still persists by performing an
additional print head cleaning, and then contact HP. A component other than the ink
cartridge is probably causing the problem.
Solutions to print quality problems are discussed in the troubleshooting section.
Print Quality defect examples:
 Color variation defect:
 Color intensity defect:
 Uneven bars (die misalignment):
 vertical dark lines:
 Vertical white lines on all bars:
 Vertical white lines on select bars:
 Gradations are not sharp:
 Ink starvation:
Printer information pages overview

Information pages reside within the product memory. These reports help diagnose and
solve problems with the product.
The following reports are covered in this section:
 Printer Status Report
 Printer Usage Report
 Network Configuration Page
 Event Log
 Fax Reports (MFP models only)
 PCL Font List
 PCL6 Font List
 PS Font List
To print a report:
1. From the Home screen, touch or press the Setup button.

2. Touch or press the Print Reports button.
3. Select the name of the report that you want to print.
NOTE: If the product language was not correctly set during installation, you can set the
language manually so the information pages print in one of the supported languages.
Change the language by using the Device Setup menu on the control panel or the EWS.
Printer Status Report

The Printer Status Report prints the ink cartridge status. It includes the following
information:
 Estimated percentage of cartridge life remaining.

 Approximate number of pages remaining.
 Part numbers for the HP ink cartridges.
 Number of pages printed.
 Information about ordering new HP ink cartridges.
 Information about recycling used HP ink cartridges.

 Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality.
 Printer Usage
 Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists
whether they were monochrome or color, simplex or duplex, and reports the page
count. This report is useful for reconciling contractual billing statements.
Network Configuration Page

The Network Configuration Page displays the status of the following:
 Network hardware configuration.

 Enabled features
 TCP/IP and SNMP information
 Network statistics
 Wireless network configuration (wireless models only)
 Event Log
 Prints a log of errors and other events during product use.
Fax Reports (MFP models only)
 Fax Confirmation Report: Reports a successful fax job.

 Fax Error Report: Reports a failed fax job.
 Last Transaction Report: Detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent
or received.
 Fax Service Report: Lists the last 40 entries in the fax log.
 Speed Dial List Report: Lists all speed dials that have been set up for this
product.
 Caller ID Report: Lists all incoming fax phone numbers.
 Junk Fax Report: Lists phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes
to this product.
Font Reports
 PCL Font List
Prints a list of all PCL fonts that are installed
 PCL6 Font List
Prints a list of all PCL6 fonts that are installed.
 PS Font List
Prints a list of a PS fonts that are installed.
HP Embedded Web Server Overview

This product is equipped with an embedded Web server (EWS), which provides access to
information about product and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in
which Web programs may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as
Windows, provides an environment for programs to run on a computer. The output from
these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser.
An Embedded Web server resides on the printer, in the firmware, rather than as software
that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an EWS is that it provides an interface to the product that anyone with a
network connected product and computer can use. There is no special software to install or
configure, but you must have a supported Web browser on the computer. To gain access to
the EWS, type the IP address for the product in the address line of the browser.
NOTE: For Mac operating systems, you can use the HP EWS over a USB connection after
installing the Mac software included with the product.
Cookies
The HP EWS places very small text files (cookies) on your hard drive when you are
browsing. These files let the HP EWS recognize your computer the next time you visit. For
example, if you have configured the HP EWS language, a cookie helps remember which
language you have selected so that the next time you access the HP EWS, the pages are
displayed in that language. Though some cookies are cleared at the end of each session
(such as the cookie that stores the selected language), others (such as the cookie that
stores customer-specific preferences) are stored on the computer until you clear them
manually.
IMPORTANT! The cookies that the HP EWS stores on your computer are only used for
saving settings on your computer or for sharing information between the printer and the
computer. These cookies are not sent to any HP Websites.
You can configure your browser to accept all cookies, or you can configure it to alert you
every time a cookie is offered, which allows you to decide which cookies to accept or
refuse. You can also use your browser to remove unwanted cookies.
Depending on your printer, if you disable cookies, you also disable one or more of
the following features:
 Starting where you left the application (especially useful when using setup
wizards).
 Remembering the HP EWS browser language setting.
 Personalizing the HP EWS Home page.
NOTE: For information about how to change your privacy and cookie settings and how to
view or delete cookies, see the documentation available with your Web browser.
Open the HP EWS

NOTE: If an error occurs while opening the HP EWS, confirm that the proxy settings are
correct for your network.
To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address or host name of the product in
the address field of a supported Web browser. To find the IP address, print a Printer Status
Report or Network Configuration Page, or get the IP address from the product control
panel.
You can also open the HP EWS from the Windows printer driver. Open the Services tab
and then click the Device and Supplies Status icon.
For Mac, open HP EWS, from the HP Utility or from System Preferences -> Print &
Scan -> [product name] -> Options & Supplies -> General -> Show Printer Webpage.
TIP: After you open the URL, bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
HP Embedded Web Server Features overview

 Home tab
 Scan tab (MFP models only)
 Fax tab (MFP models only)
 Web Services tab
 Network tab
 Tools tab
 Settings tab
NOTE: Changing network settings in the HP EWS might disable some of product, or

product software or features.
Home tab
Use the Home tab to customize various views and tasks related to your device. Settings for
this page are automatically saved in the Web browser's cookies. If the Web browser's
cookies are deleted, these settings are lost.
The Home tab includes the following items:
 Recently Visited: Displays the 5 most recently visited embedded HP EWS

links.
 Printer Status: Displays the current printer status.
 Diagnostic: Provides links to diagnostic tasks.
 ePrint: Displays the status of the ePrint connection.
 Fax Status: (MFP models only) Displays the 5 most recent entries in the fax
log.
 Ink Level Status: Displays the ink level status.
 Manage: Provides useful links for managing the HP EWS.
 Wired Network Status: (wireless models only) Displays wired (802.3) status
or wired (802.11) status.
 Setup: Displays setup options.
 Custom Shortcut: Use to customize quick links to add as a shortcut.
 Support: Links to HP support Web site.
 Scan to Computer: (MFP models only) Starts a scan to a computer
NOTE: Not all of the items are visible by default. Use the Personalize this page button
show or hide the items of your choice.
Scan tab (MFP models only)

Use the Scan tab to configure the product's scan features. The Scan tab includes the
following items:
 Scan to Computer:
Use Webscan to scan to a computer.

To enable Webscan, open the Settings tab, click on Administrator Settings,
click the Enable checkbox beside Webscan, and then click the Apply button.
IMPORTANT! When Webscan is enabled, anyone with access to the
printer can scan whatever is on the scanner glass. For security purposes,
Webscan is disabled by default.
 Scan to Email:
The Scan to Email tab includes the following items:
o Scan to Email Setup: Use to setup the Scan to Email function.
o Outgoing Email Profiles: Use to configure the sender of the

scanned documents.
o Email Address Book: Use to configure the list of people to whom

you can send scanned documents.
o Email Options: Use to configure a default SUBJECT line and body
text and configure the default scan settings.
 Scan to Network Folder:
The Scan to Network Folder tab includes the following item:
o Network Folder Setup: Configure a network folder for saving

scanned images or documents from the printer.
Fax tab (MFP models only)

Use the Fax tab to configure the product's fax features.
The fax tab includes the following items:
 Fax Setup Wizard: Configure the printer's fax feature.

 Basic Fax Settings: Change the header name/fax number and set other
basic fax settings.
 Advanced Fax Settings: Set fax details such as Error Reporting,
Confirmation, etc.
 Fax Speed-dial: Enter and store speed dial numbers.
 Fax Forwarding: Automatically redirect incoming faxes to another fax
number.
 Junk Fax Blocker: Block faxes from specific people or businesses.
 Fax Log: Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by
this product.
 Digital Fax Profile: Save incoming black-and-white faxes to a designated
folder on the network or forward them as email.
 HP Web Services tab

 Use the HP Web Services tab to configure and enable HP Web Services for this
product. You must enable HP Web Services to use the HP ePrint feature.
 Network tab
 Use the Network tab to configure and secure network settings for the product
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not display if the
product is connected to other types of networks.
Tools tab
The tools tab includes the following items:
 Product Information
o Printer Information: Find basic device information such as serial

number, name and firmware version.
o Ink Gauge: See estimated ink levels, ink cartridge part numbers,
and estimated printable pages remaining for each cartridge.
o Ink Settings: Change the threshold at which the printer provides

the "Low on Ink" notification.
 Reports
o Usage Report: View the number of pages processed for printing,

scanning, copying and faxing.
o Printer Reports: Print various reports.
o Event Log: View logged events such as firmware errors.
 Utilities
o Bookmarking: Bookmark pages in the HP EWS.
o Print Quality Toolbox: Run maintenance tools to improve the print

quality of your printouts.
o Asset Tracking: Assign an asset number/location to this device.
 Backup and Restore
o Backup: Create a password-encrypted file that stores the printer's

settings.
o Restore: Restore the printer's settings using a backup file created

by the HP EWS.
 Job Management
Job Monitor: Monitor or cancel jobs currently active or pending in the printer.
 Printer Restart
Power Cycle: Allows you to turn off and restart the printer.
Settings tab
Set and maintain various options on your product including power management, date and
time, security, printing, and paper settings, email alerts, default copy settings, restore
factory defaults and firewall settings.
HP Web Jetadmin software

HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for efficiently managing a wide
variety of networked HP devices, including printers, multifunction products, and digital
senders. This single solution allows you to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot,
and secure your printing and imaging environment — ultimately increasing business
productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin updates are periodically made available to provide support for specific
product features. Visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin and click the Self Help and
Documentation link to learn more about updates.
Security features overview

This product supports security standards and protocols that help secure the product,
protect information on your network, and simplify monitoring and maintenance of the
product.
For information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/
Secureprinting. The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security
features and may include information about additional security features that are not
contained in this document.

 Disable unused protocols and services
 Firewall
 Syslog
 Certificates
 Signed Firmware

 The HP Embedded Web Server allows you to assign an administrator password so
that unauthorized users cannot change product configuration settings in the
HP Embedded Web Server. When the admin password is assigned and applied,
you must enter the password to make any configuration changes that are done
through the HP Embedded Web Server. If you change an existing password, you
must first enter that password. You can also remove the password by entering the
existing password and then deleting the assigned password.

 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to lock certain features on the
product’s control panel to prevent unauthorized use. Once the control panel lock is
enabled, certain control panel configuration features cannot be changed from the
control panel. The control panel lock setting itself can also be secured. This is
accomplished by setting the HP Embedded Web Server administrator password.
Once the HP Embedded Web Server administrator password is set, the admin
password must be entered when accessing the control panel lock enable/disable
setting.
Disable unused protocols and services

The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to disable unused protocols and services.
These protocol and services settings can also be protected from being changed by setting
the EWS admin password.
The protocols and services include the following:
 IPv4 and IPv6 disable/enable: To operate properly on a TCP/IP network, the

product must be configured with valid TCP/IP network configuration settings,
such as an IP address that is valid for your network. This product supports
two versions of this protocol: version 4 (IPv4) and version 6 (IPv6). IPv4 and
IPv6 can be enabled/disable individually or simultaneously enabled.
 Bonjour disable/enable: Bonjour services are typically used on small
networks for IP address and name resolution where conventional a DNS
server is not used. The Bonjour service can be enabled or disabled.
 SNMP disable/enable: SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is
used by network management applications for product management. This
product supports the SNMPv1 protocol on IP networks. This product allows
the ability to enable/disable SNMPv1.
 WINS disable/enable: If you have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) service on your network, the product automatically obtains its IP
address from that server and registers its name with any RFC 1001 and 1002-
compliant dynamic name services as long as the Windows Internet Name
Service (WINS) server IP address has been specified. The WINS server IP
address configuration can be enable or disabled. If enabled, then the primary
and secondary WINS server can be specified.
 SLP disable/enable: Service Location Protocol (SLP) is an Internet standard
network protocol that provides a framework to allow network applications to
discover the existence, location and configuration of networked services in
enterprise networks. This protocol can be enabled or disabled.
 LPD disable/enable: Line Printer Daemon (LPD) refers to the protocol and
programs associated with line-printer spooling services that may be installed
on various TCP/IP systems. LPD can be enabled or disabled.
 LLMNR disable/enable: Link-Local Multicast Name Resolution (LLMNR) is a
protocol based on the Domain Name System (DNS) packet format that allows
both IPv4 and IPv6 hosts to perform name resolution for hosts on the same
local link. LLMNR can be enabled or disabled.
 Port 9100 disable/enable: The product supports raw IP printing through TCP
Port 9100. This HP-propriety TCP/IP port on the product is the default port for
printing and it is accessed by HP software. Port 9100 can be enabled or
disabled.
 Web Services disable/enable: The product supports the ability to enable or
disable Microsoft Web Services Dynamic Discovery (WS Discovery) protocols
or Microsoft Web Services for Devices (WSD) Print services supported on the
product. These web services can be enabled or disabled together or WS
Discovery can be enabled separately.
 Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) disable/enable: Internet Printing Protocol
(IPP) is an Internet-standard protocol that allows you to print documents and
manage jobs over the internet. IPP can be disabled or enabled.
 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to enable and disable certain
product capabilities. These include network, Ethernet, wireless, wireless access
point (i.e. disables wireless direct capability), USB, fax, fax reprint, copy, digital
send, webscan, control panel lock, color fax, color copy, color print from memory
devices, all web services, only ePrint, and only Apps. The product must be turned
off, and then turned on again, for settings to take effect.

 HP’s suite of color access control tools allows you to enable or disable color by
individuals users or groups and applications. For more information see
www.hp.com/go/upd. The HP Embedded Web Server also allows you to disable
color faxing, color copying, and color print from memory devices.

 The HP Embedded Web Server features the ability to enable encryption of product
communication through the HTTPS redirection feature. When used, HTTPS
prevents others from viewing information between the EWS and the product via
encryption – providing a secure communication method.
 Firewall
 The HP Embedded Web Server allows the ability to enable and configure product
firewall rules, priorities, templates, services and policies. The firewall feature
provides a network-layer of security on both IPv4 and IPv6 networks. The firewall
configuration capability provides control over IP addresses that are allowed access
the product, and the ability to set permissions and priorities for digital send,
management, discovery, and print services--providing a more secure way of
controlling access to the product.
 Syslog
 Support of Syslog, a standard protocol for logging status messages to a designated
server, can be used to track the activities and status of devices on the network. The
HP Embedded Web Service provides the ability to enable Syslog and to specify the
server to which the status messages will be sent. Specifying the priority of those
status messages is also supported.
 Certificates
 The HP Embedded Web Server provides the ability to install and manage
certificates for the authentication of product, server and network. This includes the
ability to create a certificate, install a certificate, and import and export certificates.
 Signed Firmware
 Support of digitally-signed firmware updates eliminates exposure to malicious
software by preventing the installation of non-approved firmware on the product.
 The HP Embedded Web Server provides the ability to configure wireless
networking via such 802.1x wireless enterprise authentication protocols as EAP-
TLS, LEAP, and PEAP to support access control. The HP Embedded Web Server
also provides the ability to configure wireless dynamic key encryption such as WEP
encryption and WPA-PSK authentication. In addition, Wireless Direct Authentication
can be enabled or disabled.
Economy settings
 General Office mode
General Office print mode uses less ink, which can extend the life of the ink
cartridges.
 Power Handling
The product includes power handling features that can help reduce energy
consumption.
The Standby and Sleep After Standby modes reduce power consumption
when the product has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the
length of time before the product enters Standby or Sleep After Standby
modes.
The Schedule On/Off feature turns the product on or off after a certain length
of time. You can adjust this time-delay setting.
CSR parts overview
CSR parts and supplies are designated as Mandatory or Optional.
 Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers,

unless the customer is willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the
repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not provided
under the HP product warranty.
 Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service
personnel at the request of the customer for no additional charge during the
product warranty period.
The part information in this table applies to both the HP Officejet Pro X451 and
X551 and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576.
Left door Mandatory CN598-67001
Left door
straps
Output bin flap Mandatory CN598-67006
The part information in this table applies only to the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576.
Document
Feeder
CSR parts replacement overview

This section contains procedures to replace customer self-repair parts available for
the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576. If the
replacement procedure for a part is not in this section, complete removal and replacement
instructions are available for reference in the product Service Manual.
Click the Next Topic arrow ► to view step-by-step instructions for replacing CSR parts.
Use the contents menu to view specific videos or jump to the Maintenance and clearing
jams section.
The list of CSR parts, installation guides, and the videos shown in this section are available
to customers on the product support page and www.hp.com/support.
Left door replacement
The left door is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the left door.

6. Underneath the rear door hinge, locate the catch lever close to the edge of
the product.
7. While pushing the catch lever to the rear of the product, rotate the door to
the right, and then remove the door.
Left door straps

The left door straps are mandatory CSR parts.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the left door straps.

6. Remove the straps from the mounting pins in the product chassis.
Output bin flap

The output bin flap is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow below for instructions on removing and replacing the output bin
flap.

3. Remove the output bin.
4. Flex the middle of the output bin flap, and then remove the flap.
NOTE: The front (or left) pin of the output flap should be removed last,
and inserted first.

Document Feeder
The document feeder is a mandatory CSR part.
Click the Play arrow for instructions on removing and replacing the document feeder.

3. Lift the document feeder assembly (which also functions as the flatbed scanner
lid).
4. Lift the left hinge.
5. While holding the document feeder, use a screwdriver to remove the document
feeder connector cover.
6. Use a screwdriver to disconnect the cable connector
7. Tilt the assembly toward the front of the product, and then lift the document
feeder up to remove it.
NOTE: The posts on the document feeder are stiff and require some effort
to remove from the product.
9. Accessories and Supplies overview
Part
Item Description
number
Standard-capacity black ink cartridge with

Ink cartridges CN621A
High-capacity black ink cartridge with

CN625A
Standard-capacity cyan ink cartridge with

CN622A
High-capacity cyan ink cartridge with

CN626A
Standard-capacity yellow ink cartridge with

CN624A
Part
Item Description
number
High-capacity yellow ink cartridge with

CN628A
Standard-capacity magenta ink cartridge with

CN623A
High-capacity magenta ink cartridge with

CN627A
Paper handling
CN595A 500-sheet paper feeder (optional Tray 3)
accessories
USB cable 8121-0868 2-meter A-to-B cable
Advanced CN459–
Advanced cleaning kit
maintenance kits 67006
CN598–
Sled service kit
67021
Replacing the ink cartridges

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how to replace an ink cartridge.
1. Open the ink cartridge door.

2. Push the old ink cartridge inward to unlock it.
3. Grasp the edge of the old ink cartridge and then pull the cartridge straight
out to remove it.
4. Insert the new ink cartridge into the product.
5. Close the ink cartridge door.
6. Place the old ink cartridge in the new ink cartridge box and refer to HP's
recycling instructions at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
Clean the scanner

Specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing over time,
which can affect copy and scan quality. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner.
Use the following procedure to clean the scanner:

3. Open the scanner lid.
4. Clean the scanner glass, the document feeder strips, and the white plastic
backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive
glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl
alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can
damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen.
They might seep and damage the product.
5. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to
prevent spotting.
6. Close the scanner lid.
7. Connect the power cable, and then turn on the product
Clean the document feeder

Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad if the document feeder does
not correctly pick up pages.
Use the following procedure to clean the document feeder:
1. Open the document-feeder cover.

2. Use a moist, lint-free cloth to wipe both pickup rollers and the separation pad to
remove dirt.
3. Close the document-feeder cover.
Clean the printhead

During the printing process, paper, ink, and dust particles can accumulate inside the
product. Over time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as ink specks or
smearing. This product has a cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of
problems.
Use the following procedure to clean the printhead from the product control panel:

2. Touch the Tools menu.
3. Touch the Clean Printhead button.
4. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.
5. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the
process is completed.
Clean the touchscreen
Clean the touch screen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the
touch screen gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not
pour or spray water directly onto the touch screen.
Clearing jams overview

Jams can occur in the following locations in both the HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551
Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series products:
1 Output bin
2 Left door
3 Optional Tray 3 and left jam-access door
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2
Clear jams in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how to clear a jam from Tray 1.
1. If the jammed sheet is visible and easily accessible in Tray 1, pull it from Tray 1.
NOTE: If the sheet tears, make sure that all of the fragments are removed
before you resume printing.
2. The jammed sheet may also be accessible by removing Tray 2 and removing
the jammed sheet by pulling it to the right and then out of the product.
3. If the jammed sheet is not visible or easily accessible in Tray 1, open the left
door to access the jammed sheet.
4. If the paper is still not visible or accessible, remove the duplexer by pulling it out
ink spills.
Clear jams in Tray 2

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam from Tray 2.
1. Open Tray 2 by pulling it out and releasing the latch at the rear left of the tray.
3. Close Tray 2.
Clear jams in optional Tray 3

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam from optional Tray 3.
1. Open Tray 3.
3. If the jam cannot be cleared at the tray, try clearing the jam from the Tray 3 left
door.
4. Close Tray 3.
Clear jams in the left door

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the left door.

2. Gently remove any visible paper from the rollers and delivery area.
you resume printing. Do not use sharp objects to remove fragments.
Clear jams in the output bin

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the output bin.
1. Look for jammed paper in the output bin area.

2. Remove any visible media.
resuming printing.
3. Open and then close the left door to clear the message.
Clear jams in the duplexer

Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the duplexer.

2. If you can see the trailing edge of the sheet, remove the sheet from the product.
3. If the paper is not visible or accessible, remove the duplexer by pulling it out
ink spills.
Clearing jams in the document feeder HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series only
Click the Play arrow on the video below to see how clear a jam in the document feeder.
1. Turn the product off.

2. Open the document feeder cover.
3. Press the green tab to lift the document feeder roller assembly, and gently pull
the jammed paper out.
4. Close the document feeder cover.
5. Open the scanner lid. If paper is jammed behind the white plastic backing,
gently pull it o
Support
 Identify the available support and troubleshooting resources.

 Understand the basic theory of operation.
 Troubleshoot the major product components.


 Grow@HP
Search Grow@HP for:
o Additional resources for both products.
o HP ePrint training material.
o Information about additional related products and features.
Theory of operation overview

This section of the course provides an overview of the overall theory of operation of the
products. Systems and processes that are similar to other HP Officejet products are not
included in the course. See the product Service Manual for more information.
Theory of operation topics:
 Service-level walkaround
 Basic operation
 System control
 Print subsystem
 Paper-handling system
 Servicing system
 Transmission system
 Aerosol management system
 Document feeder
 Scanner
 Fax functions and operation
See the product Service Manual for additional information.
Document feeder and scanner assembly (HP Officejet Pro X476 and
X576 only)
f
1 Scanner assembly CN460-67009 1
2 Document feeder assembly CN598-67008 1
Covers, panels and doors (X451 and X551 Series models)
1 Rear cover CN598-67047 1
3 Output bin CN598-67007 1
4 Right cover CN598-67051 1
5 Front cover CN598-67052 1
6 Left door CN598-67001 1
7 Left front cover CN598-67050 1
8 Left rear cover CN598-67049 1

10 Top cover—X551 CV037-67003 1
10 Top cover—X451 CN459-67007 1
11 Strap, left door CN598-67002 1
12 Strap, left door, rear CN598-67003 1
13 Hinge, ISS door CN598-67053 2
Covers, panels, and doors (X476 and X576 Series models)

f
CN598-
1 Rear cover 1
67047
CN598-
2 Eject flap assembly 1
67023
CN598-
3 Output bin 1
67007
CN598-
4 Right cover 1
67051
f
CN598-
5 Front cover 1
67052
CN598-
6 Left door 1
67001
CN598-
7 Left front cover 1
67050
CN598-
8 Left rear cover 1
67049
CN460-
9 Control panel assembly—non-wireless models 1
67005
CN461-
9 Control panel assembly—wireless models 1
67003
CN460-
10 Top cover 1
67010
CN598-
11 Strap, left door 1
67002
CN598-
12 Strap, left door, rear 1
67003
CN598-
13 Hinge, ISS door 2
67053
1 Upper hanger assembly Not supported 1
2 Vertical star wheel wall Not supported 1
3 Aerosol fan assembly CN598-67046 1
4 Eject drive gear module CN598-67022 1
Not shown Flap actuator solenoid CN598-67022 1
Not shown Rack-eject lifter flap CN598-67022 1
5 Duplex drive module CN598-67036 1
6 Floor eject assembly Not supported 1
7 Power supply CN598-67016 1
7 Power supply—India and China only CN598-67017 1
9 Cross brace, right Not supported 1
10 Web advance rack assembly CN598-67021 1
11 Service sled assembly CN598-67021 1

12 Media presence sensor PCA/flag CN598-67034 1
13 REDI sensors CN598-67038 3
Not shown BDD sensor CN598-67035 1
Not shown FFC, 11 pin printzone CN598-67039 1
Not shown FFC, 24 pin printbar lift CN598-67040 1
Not shown FFC, 10 pin pick drive enc CN598-67041 1
Not shown FFC, 12 pin REDI distribution CN598-67042 1
Not shown FFC, 5 pin sensor carriage BDD CN598-67043 1
Not shown FFC, 3xFFC, printbar bundle kit CN598-67044 1
1 Transfer 3 shaft Not supported 1
2 Output upper 4 shaft Not supported 1

5 Output lower 2 shaft Not supported 1
6 Gear, shaft output lower Not supported 1
CN598-
7 Gear, output idler gear, 83t/30t 1
67031
CN598-
8 Gear, idler gear train, 78t/48t 2
67031
9 Spurgear, idler gear train, 52t Not supported 1
10 Platen output 1 shaft Not supported 1
11 Gear, shaft output platen 1 Not supported 1

number
Platen
1 CN598-
NOTE: The platen kit contains a TOF REDI 1
67025
sensor and a print zone REDI sensor.
Not
2 Encoder disk 1
supported
number
CN598-
3 Feedshaft Encoder PCA 1
67030
Not
4 Feedshaft 1
supported
CN598-
5 Drying path gear assembly 1
67060
CN598-
6 Tray lift transmission assembly 1
67020
CN598-
7 Separator/pick assembly kit 1
67018
CN598-
8 Printbar 1
67045
Not CN598-
Printbar lift mechanism assembly 1
shown 67027
CN598-
9 Separation assembly 1
67018
CN598-
10 Power button assembly 1
67019
CN598-
11 Duplex presence sensor PCA 1
67057
CN598-
12 Duplex module 1
67004
CN598-
13 Z stop, printbar lift rod 2
67048
number
Not CN598-
Shaft, printbar lift, clutched 1
shown 67028
PCA locations (front view)

f
1 Eject flap opto PCA CN598-67023 1
2 Pick encoder distribution PCA CN598-67029 1
3 Print zone distribution PCA CN598-67033 1
4 Feedshaft encoder PCA CN598-67030 1
5 Duplex presence sensor PCA CN598-67057 1
6 Power button assembly CN598-67019 1
7 REDI distribution PCA, CN598-67037 1
PCA locations (rear view)
1 Sensor carriage PCA/encoder strip CN598-67061 1

2 Media presence flag/opto PCA kit CN598-67034 1
3 Main PCA (X551dw models) CV037-67001 1
3 Main PCA (X576 models) CN598-67054 1
4 Tray 3 interconnect PCA CN598-67059 1
5 Fax PCA CN460-67007 1
6 Temperature sensor CN598-67024 1
7 Wireless PCA CN598-67055 1
Not
Control panel FFC (X451 models) CN463–67003 1
shown
Not
Control panel FFC (X551 models) CV037-67002 1
shown
Not Control panel FFC (X476 and X576 models) CN460-67008 1

shown
Basic operation overview

The following elements influence the product architecture:
 The first is the need to orient the printbar with its active face downwards and
statically located above the print media. This requires the printbar to move
vertically to access its active face.
 The second is producing face-down output. Rather than ejecting the page
face-up immediately after the ink is applied, the printed page is routed up and
back over the printbar to eject face-down.
Main components
Series are similar products except that the HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP
Series has a document feeder, scanner, and fax capability and the HP Officejet Pro X451
and X551 Series does not.
Main Components
 Control panel
 Output bin
 Printbar
 Service sled
 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1)
 Duplex module
 Main input tray (Tray 2)
 Optional tray (Tray 3)
HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 only
 Document feeder
 Scanner
Operation sequence overview

The engine-control system on the formatter PCA controls the operational sequences
The following sequence of operation occurs, from when the product is turned on
until the motor stops rotating:
 Initial startup and calibration
 Servicing operations
 Print preparation
 Print
 End of print job
 Standby
Initial startup and calibration

The initial startup and calibration prepares the product to print for the first time. It is
performed when the product is set up for the first time from the factory.
Initial startup and calibration:
 System flush: Flushes the shipping and handling fluid out of the printbar and
replaces it with ink.
 Die alignment: Aligns the 10 die on the printbar active face.
 Die density leveling: Measures and compensates for the drop variation.
Servicing
Servicing operations maintain the print quality by ensuring debris and excess ink are
removed and missing nozzles are replaced. Servicing operations are performed when the
printbar is entering the capping state after printing, leaving capping state after a print job is
initiated, or during extended print jobs.
Servicing operations:
 Nozzle presence detection: The optical scan carriage detects and disables
inoperable nozzles, and replaces them with operable nozzles.
 Printbar servicing:The web wipe on the service sled moves under the
printbar to clean the active face and fire the nozzles into the maintenance ink
module to clear clogs.
Print preparation
Print preparation occurs from the time the product receives a product command until the
paper enters the print zone.
Print preparation operations:
 The printbar leaves the capping state as the service sled moves away from
the printbar.
 The printbar lowers to the printing position. The media type and printing mode
determine the print zone height.
 The product picks media from one of the input trays.
 Every page from Tray 1 is scanned. For Tray 2 and optional Tray 3, the
product performs media edge detection after printing the first sheet after the
main or optional tray is loaded. The last sheet of each job is also scanned if at
least five sheets have been printed.
 The product monitors environmental conditions. The product can slow the
print speed if conditions are significantly different than a normal office
environment (23° C (73.4° F), 50% relative humidity).
 The formatter PCA processes print data and transmits the data to the printbar.
Printing
Print operations occur from the end of the preparation period until the last sheet is
delivered. The printing process can be interrupted by occasional nozzle presence detection
and servicing events if the job includes many pages.
Print operations:
 As the page travels through the print zone, the printbar applies ink to the
page.
 Simplex print job–the page moves up, over the printbar, and out to the output
bin (face-down).
 Duplex print job–the page moves up until the trailing edge is 40 mm (1.5
inches) past the star-wheel jam reflective sensor, then it reverses direction
down through the duplex path underneath the maintenance ink module, and
then it reenters the print zone where the printbar applies ink to the second
side.
 The process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed.
End of print job

End of print job operations are performed after the print job is completed, and continue until
the next job is initiated. These operations put the product in a state where it’s ready for the
next print job.
End of print job operations:

 The printbar moves to the capping position after a short dwell interval.
 The service sled moves to cap the printbar.
Standby
During standby, the product is sitting idle, waiting for the next print job to be initiated. This
period is intended to conserve energy when the product is sitting idle. Certain functions
might be disabled to save power, and re-started only when needed.
The product has the following sleep modes:
 Idle mode—The printbar is capped and the product is ready to immediately

start a new job.
 Sleep1 mode—After the product is inactive for about 10 minutes (a setting
that can be adjusted from the control panel), the control panel dims and the
power LED blinks to indicate the unit is in Sleep1. All product functions are
available.
 Sleep2 mode—After the product is inactive for a longer period of time
(typically 2 hours, a setting that can be adjusted from the control panel), the
engine controller powers down to minimize power consumption.
System Control overview
The system control coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the
formatter. The engine PCA integrates both formatter and engine control electronics onto a
single assembly. The wireless radio unit (wireless models only) plugs into the back of the
engine PCA, and the fax connects via a short flat-flexible cable (FFC).
The system consists of five major sections:
 Formatter
 Data path
 Engine control
 Pen interface
 Power supply
Formatter and data path

The formatter controller ASIC controls the input/output (I/O) control, the user interface, and
the rendering of page description language files into product-specific commands.
Input/output (I/O) control
 The product supports 10/100 Ethernet, 802.11 wireless (wireless models), a

rear USB host port, a control panel USB host port, and analog fax port.
 For Ethernet networks, the formatter ASIC uses a separate integrated circuit
(Broadcom 5241) to provide the physical network layer.
 The formatter ASIC controls the USB device and USB host as well.
 Wireless I/O is provided via a separate radio module.
User interface
 The product contains a 4.3-in color graphics display.

 For wireless models, there is an additional LED to denote that the wireless
feature is enabled.
 The control panel includes a USB host port for connection to thumb drives.
Formatter digital ASIC
 Has dual ARM CPUs (792 MHz and 528 MHz) that execute firmware code
that provides high-level device control.
 Uses a standard PCle interface to pass data to the engine control ASIC.
Formatter analog ASIC
 Generates the system voltage for the formatter.

 Drives the scanner and Document feeder motors.
 Manages the real-time clock.
 Drives the fax speaker.
 The engine uses this ASIC to drive the ISS pumps, solenoids, and aerosol
fan.
Real-time clock
 Allows the fax module to time-stamp outgoing faxes.

 Determines the elapsed time between printhead and ISS calibration events.
 Uses a special block inside the engine analog ASIC, along with a crystal and
a battery.
Engine Control overview

The engine PCA hosts the following:
 Engine controller digital ASIC—Controls motors, system sensors, and the

printbar
 Engine controller analog ASIC—Integrates motor drivers, voltage
regulators, sensor interfaces, and supervisory circuits.
 Additional PCAs—interface to sensors and other subsystem components.
NOTE: In some cases, circuitry is located on a smaller remote PCA (SLB) to optimize cable
interconnects.
Engine controller digital ASIC

The engine controller digital ASIC has a high-performance 480 MHz ARM CPU and DSP
co-processors that execute firmware code to provide low-level engine control.
It also drives the printbar via 15 highspeed LVDS transmission lines, which are routed from
the engine PCA to the printbar via two large FFC cables.
The engine controller digital ASIC receives pre-rendered data from the formatter digital
ASIC over a standard PCle interface.
In some product sleep modes, the digital ASIC powers down. If a print job is received while
the product is in this mode, power resumes to the digital ASIC, which then must “boot up”.
This can take approximately 15 seconds, which will delay the first page out (FPO) time
accordingly. This sleep mode typically begins after two hours of product inactivity, although
the user can change this setting.
Engine controller analog ASIC

The engine uses two analog ASICs to generate the system voltages for the engine, drive
the engine motors, control various engine sensors, and monitor printbar power delivery for
correct operation.
Each one is a DC motor with encoder feedback, to provide precision servo control. These
motors are driven directly by one of the engine analog ASICs. Small DC motors also are
used to drive the ISS pump and the aerosol fan. There are solenoids that actuate the
ejection flap and the ISS priming system.
The product uses many sensors to track the media as it travels through the paper path.
Most of these are optical REDI sensors, which are used in conjunction with mirrors to
sense the presence or absence of paper in a particular location. These are carefully aligned
and calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.
The engine has seven motors, some of which are shared with other subsystems:
 Pick motor
 Feed motor
 Duplex motor
 Lift motor
 Eject motor
 Sensor carriage motor
 Aerosol fan motor
Additional printed circuit-board assemblies (PCAs)

PCA circuits that interface to sensors:
 Humidity sensor—The humidity sensor causes the product to adjust printing

speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal humidity range. This
sensor is calibrated at the factory to ensure maximum accuracy.
 Temperature sensor—The temperature sensor causes the product to adjust
printing speed if ambient conditions are outside the optimal temperature
range. In some products, this sensor resides on a separate, remote PCA.
 Main tray presence sensor—The hall-effect sensor that detects if the main
tray is properly engaged resides on the back of the engine PCA. A small
magnet on the back of the main tray actuates the sensor. If the tray is fully
engaged, the magnetic field strength is sufficient to trigger the sensor.
PCA circuits that interface to subsystem components:
 Front USB PCA—Governs the control panel USB port.

 Fax PCA—Governs the product fax module.
 Duplex module presence sensor—A hall-effect sensor that detects that the
duplex module is properly seated.
 Power button PCA—Includes the power button and power LED, and
interface cables to the duplex module presence sensor and the MP tray
empty REDI sensor.
 Accessory tray interconnect PCA—Provides communication to optional
Tray 3.
 Pick encoder distribution PCA—Includes the pick motor encoder and the
pick motor interconnect cable.
 Eject encoder distribution PCA—Includes the eject motor encoder, plus the
interconnect cables to the eject motor and the aerosol fan.
 Print zone distribution PCA—Joins interconnect cables to the following
sensors: separator REDI, feed motion encoder, main tray empty sensor, Top
of Form (TOF) REDI sensor, and the Print zone REDI sensor.
 REDI distribution PCA—Includes hall-effect sensors that detect ink cartridge
door and left door positions. It also combines the interconnect cables for the
Eject REDI sensor, the Upper paper path REDI sensor, the Lower paper path
REDI sensor, and the eject flap opto flag sensor.
 Sensor carriage PCA—Includes a carriage motion encoder, a ZIM sensor,
and the BDD sensor.
 Printbar lift encoder distribution PCA—Includes the printbar lift motion
encoder, and combines interconnect cables to the printbar lift motor, carriage
motor, and eject flap solenoid.
 Duplex encoder PCA—Contains the motion encoder for the duplex motor.
 SHAID PCA—Contains interfaces to the out-of-ink sensors for the ink
cartridges, and combines the interface cables to the acumen PCA, the ISS
pump, and the ISS solenoids
 Acumen PCA—Contains interfaces to the acumen memory devices for the
ink cartridges.
 Pen interface (I/F)

 The conventional approach is to print a page in horizontal swaths by moving a
“scanning” printhead horizontally over a fixed sheet of paper, advancing the paper a
fixed amount, and then printing the next swath. With this product, the paper moves
underneath a fixed page-wide printhead in a single smooth motion. The single pass
page-wide printing used in this product requires that data and power be delivered to
the printbar at a very high rate, while also maintaining good control of paper
position as it moves past the printhead nozzles.
 The engine PCA sends power and data to the printbar through two large flat flexible
cables (36 and 38 pins). The printbar PCA routes power and data to 10 printhead
die, which are attached to the PCA using a flexible tab circuit and wire-bonding
process.
 There are also electronics to control the ink supply station (ISS). The SHAID PCA
detects low-ink conditions. It gauges ink levels by means of electrically sensing the
presence of ink and/or ink foam in the X-chamber. The SHAID PCA also collects
and distributes electrical signals that drive the push-prime pump(s), engage the
solenoids, and read the ink supply acumen data. All are routed through a single 17-
pin FFC from the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA.
 Each ink supply has a memory tag that stores information about the type of ink, the
amount of ink remaining, and other critical data. It uses a special authentication
scheme to ensure that only genuine HP supplies are used and the product is not
damaged by using invalid supplies. Acumen uses a two line serial bus, which, along
with 3.3 V and ground, is cabled through the SHAID PCA to the engine PCA and
the engine control digital ASIC.
Power supply
The power supply module converts 100-240 VAC to 33 VDC to power the system. The
power supply module has a sleep mode that reduces power consumption in system low-
power modes. When in its sleep mode, the power supply generates approximately 12 V.
The power supply module supplies 33 V to the engine PCA.
The power supply module has two operating modes, depending upon the state of its
nSLEEP input pin:
 Normal mode: Vo = 33 V (nSLEEP = high logic level)

 Sleep mode: Vo = 12 V (nSLEEP = low logic level)
The power supply is a self-contained module that can be replaced if it is determined to be

defective.
To ensure safe operation, the power supply will “latch off” if a persistent over-current fault
condition exists. This would typically be caused by a short-circuit from 33 V to ground in the
product. In addition, less severe faults can cause the power supply to latch off, if present for
an extended period of time, or if the product is operated above the recommended operating
range.
NOTE: In some countries/regions, the product is equipped with a high-voltage power
supply in order to prevent power supply unit failures due to over-voltage conditions.
Print subsystem overview

This section covers print system components and operational states.
Print subsystem components
Print Subsystem Components
 Printbar
 Printbar lift
 Ink cartridges
Printbar
The printbar’s fundamental purpose is to convert the digital firing instructions from the
product electronics into properly formed and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.
The printbar spans the full width of a letter/A4-size sheet (216 mm (8.5 in), which allows the
printbar to be statically positioned within the product and have the media move underneath
it, printing the entire page in a single motion
Printbar components
Item Description
1 Ink cartridge connections
2 Thermal inkjet (TIJ) die array
3 Data/power flow and regulation
4 Inkflow channels and pressure regulation
The printbar has a fixed array of 10 thermal inkjet (TIJ) die oriented in two staggered rows.
Each die contains more than 1,000 nozzles for each of the four ink colors (black (K), cyan
(C), magenta (M) and yellow (Y)). Behind the die array are the ink flow channels and
pressure regulation mechanisms that supply the die array with ink at the proper pressure
and flow. The die must also be fed power and data at the appropriate levels and rates,
which is the function of the onboard electronic circuitry. Finally, situated at the top of the
printbar, there are four ink cartridge receptacles, one for each color. These cartridges are
linked by flow connections to the rest of the printbar and supply the ink necessary for its
operation.
A sensor technology called back-scatter drop detect (BDD) monitors printbar health and
calibrations. This system looks at the reflection of the miniscule drops in flight, and then
passes these signals through high-speed, high-gain, bandpass filters. A complex artificial
intelligence (AI) system decides which drop ejectors are currently out of specifications, and
which are not.
After the AI system determines which drop ejectors are out of specification, the product
compensates for them. Some ejectors use neighboring nozzles and at times even tiny
amounts of other inks – whichever combination of methods necessary to deliver the best
print quality possible at that moment. In some cases, fully half of the nozzles can be “out”
without a noticeable degradation in quality. The compensation is done in real time with a
dedicated high-speed DSP. The system can scan portions of the system after print jobs,
but it is fully interruptible by new incoming print jobs.
Printbar air management system

The printbar uses a passive airgain management system. Air can enter the printbar
from the following sources:
 Die outgassing (from air in the ink)

 Air entering nozzles due to temperature / pressure variations
 Air entry through the printbar structure
 Air entry through the nozzles due to shipment vibration
Air that enters the printbar is warehoused. There is no mechanism to remove the air in the
field. Of the various mechanisms for air entry, the first three are generally benign, and
rarely cause issues during the expected life of the product. The fourth mechanism generally
occurs during shipment. New products are shipped with the printbar taped–which limits the
amount of air gained. If the printbar isn’t well restrained during shipment, then air gain can
be significant. If the product is shipped after removal of the printbar tape, airgain can be
reduced either by ensuring that the product stays on its base, or that the printbar is
restrained. Both would be best.
Printbar lift
The printbar lift is responsible for positioning the printbar it within the product and moving it
up and down as required. This vertical motion is both to establish proper spacing to the
paper during printing, and to raise it to either access the active face or perform necessary
calibrations.
During printing, the lift mechanism sets the printbar height and paper height depending on
the type of paper.
Optical scan carriage

The optical scan carriage has optical sensors used for calibration. Its motion is along the
long axis of the printbar. These sensors are used by a number of in-product calibration
features that are important for proper subsystem function. The BDD sensor is located on
the optical scan carriage.
Print system operation states overview

The print subsystem has the following distinct operational states:
 Startup
 Die alignment
 Printing
 Startup
 As it comes from the factory, the printbar is initially filled with an inert ink-substitute
called Shipping and Handling Fluid (SHF). This fluid, essential for the manufacture
and transportation of the printbar, must be flushed and replaced with actual ink.
This is accomplished during the startup phase. The flushing process automatically
commences when ink supplies are inserted and the unit powered up for the first
time. The SHF is removed by sustained printbar operation and replaced by ink from
the supplies. The process terminates once all the SHF has been flushed from the
printbar.
 Special host supplies are supplied with the product prior to its first use. These
supplies contain additional ink so that the SHF can be replaced with ink, and there
will still be a 100 percent of ink level. These supplies can be used only to initialize
the product. You cannot use them in another product that has been initialized.
 NOTE: The initial startup time is noticeably longer than the following regular startup
times.
 Die alignment
 Since there are 10 die comprising the printbar active face, each with associated
positional tolerances, an active calibration must be performed to prevent errors and
allow a uniform ink application to the media (without any gaps or overlaps between
adjacent die). This die alignment is done by printing a special diagnostic image on a
sheet of paper and then scanning it with the optical scan carriage. Die alignment is
performed as part of initial unit startup, and can be performed manually as part of
the print quality recovery tool.

 There are also tolerances associated with the drops fired by the individual printbar
die. Another active calibration measures and compensates for these variations to
produce a visually uniform ink application to the media. Another set of diagnostic
images is printed and scanned by the optical scan carriage to achieve this die
density leveling. Die alignment and die density leveling are usually paired together.

 In printing, since all the ink is applied in a single smooth motion of the media past
the printbar, any inoperable nozzle can show up as a noticeable streak. The
operational state of each of the thousands of nozzles comprising the printbar is
periodically measured after a certain amount of printing. The printbar is raised by
the printbar lift, and the BDD assembly on the optical scan carriage watches for
drop presence as each nozzle is fired. Inoperable nozzles are turned off and other
operable nozzles employed on subsequent printed pages to apply the missing ink.
Nozzle presence detection can be interrupted by new incoming print jobs.

 The product employs a learning algorithm to define media center as a function of
input source– multipurpose tray, main tray, or accessory tray. The edge scan is
located downstream of the print zone. As media is scanned, the media center
database is updated. The image is registered to the page using the media center
database.

 When not in use, the printbar is normally in the capped state – the printbar is fully
raised, the service sled is positioned underneath, and the printbar cap engaged
against the printbar active face. Servicing– the cleaning of the active face and the
firing of the nozzles–can occur either during Sleep2 mode or after extended time in
storage. It can also occur during extended print jobs.
 Printing
 The printing state begins by the printbar leaving the capping state, and being
lowered to the printing position after the service sled moves out of the way.
Concurrently, a sheet of media is picked from one of the trays and the leading edge
staged at the entrance to the print zone. Once the print data has been processed
and is available for transmission to the printbar, the sheet is fed at a constant
velocity through the print zone and the ink applied by the printbar.
 In the case of one-sided printing the inked sheet is moved up, over and out to the
output tray. For two-sided printing the sheet is moved until its trailing edge is past
the merge to the vertical path and then it is reversed, through the duplex path
underneath the maintenance ink module, and reintroduced into the print zone for
inking of the second side.
 This process continues until all the pages of the print job are completed. If the print
job is large enough, it can be interrupted by servicing processes.
 Paper-handling system overview

 This section covers the product paper path, zones, and components.
 The paper-handling system moves paper through the product according to
commands from the formatter.
Paper-handling system paper path
Components of the paper path move the paper from the desired input tray to
a position underneath the printbar, and then deliver the printed result to the
output tray. It is the combined orientations and actions of the printbar, the
printbar lift, and the paper path that establish the print zone, which is the
precisely controlled region in which the ink drops move from the active face
of the printbar to the paper situated 1 to 2 mm beneath it.
Paper path zones overview
Paper path zones
1. Deskew buckle
2. Print zone
3. Duplex
4. Output
5. Eject
Deskew buckle
The deskew buckle is the area between the turn roller and feed roller, and all print job
paper passes through this zone. During the deskew operation, the duplex module/MP tray
motor rotates forward, driving the paper into the feed roller nip while the feed roller is not
moving. The Top of Form (TOF) REDI sensor determines the leading edge for accurate
deskew buckle size, jam detection, and if the tray successfully picked media.
Print zone
The print zone is the path between the feed roller and output pinch 1 roller. The feed roller,
which has an analog quadrature encoder, precisely controls the paper in the paper feed
direction. In the vertical direction, a combination of the platen, feed roller, and output pinch
roller 1 controls the paper. The user can rotate the platen down for jam access after
removing the duplex module.
There are no paper path sensors in the print zone. Therefore, if a jam occurs in the print
zone, it is not detected until the leading edge of the paper is determined to be “late” in
reaching the jam sensor in the output path.
When a user pulls on jammed media in the print zone that is still partially in the feed roller
nip, the servo control will detect a slight movement of the feed roller and assist the user by
applying a forward torque to the roller. Also, the motion control system will disengage the
duplex module rectifier (swing arm) so that the turn roller can spin freely. This feature
reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore reduces the chance of leaving
torn pieces of paper in the path–especially in the deskew buckle zone.
Duplex
By opening the left door, the duplex module can be removed to clear jams. The duplex
module also serves as a maintenance ink collection unit for the printbar and will expose the
user to maintenance ink when it is removed; therefore there are warnings on the module
not to touch certain areas.
When a user pulls on jammed media from the duplex module (or any of the trays) that is
partially in the feed roller nip, the servo control will detect a slight movement of the feed
roller and assist the user by applying a reverse torque to the feed roller and disengage.
Also, the motion control system will disengage the duplex module rectifier so the turn roller
can spin freely. This feature reduces the pulling force needed by the user and therefore
reduces the chance of leaving torn pieces of paper in the path – especially in the deskew
buckle zone.
To determine its presence, the duplex module has a magnet that triggers a hall effect
sensor mounted to the product chassis.
Output
The output path begins at output pinch roller 1 and continues to output pinch roller 5. There
are four REDI sensors in this path that detect leading and trailing edges and jams.
The feed motor drives the rollers in the output path, except output pinch roller 5. All the
pinch rollers in the output and exit path are star wheels to prevent roller tracking on
wet/damp ink. However, the turn roller pinch is solid and has a high amount of force for
deskew buckle formation. Also, the feed motor drives all output shafts except shafts 5 and
6.
The Lower paper path REDI, Upper paper path REDI, and Eject REDI sensor in the output
path all track the leading and trailing edges of paper.
The outer and top portions of the vertical path are formed by paper guides molded in and
attached to the left door. The left door can be opened for jam clearance and has a hall
effect sensor to determine if it is closed. Also when the left door is opened, drive rollers that
form pinches 3 and 4 disengage from the feed motor for safety purposes.
Eject
The eject portion of the paper path includes the zone from output pinch roller 5 to the eject
flap.
The eject motor powers output pinch roller 5 and eject pinch roller 6.
The eject flap has three positions:
 Closed—Not printing.
 Partially open—Heavy ink printing in dry environments, to limit severe curl.
 Fully open—All other printing. This position controls moderately curled
media.
The eject flap is opened and closed by a torque clutch on the eject roller shaft. The flap
also has a locking feature that is controlled by a solenoid. In order for the door to open all
the way, or move between positions, the solenoid must be actuated.
Paper path components overview

The paper path consists of the following major components:
 Two integrated input trays plus one optional accessory tray.

 Four motors and a solenoid plus two more motors in the accessory tray.
 Duplex module.
 Fourteen sensors plus four more sensors in the accessory tray.
 Multiple feed rollers, pinch rollers, star wheels, and media guides.
 Transmission components (gears, shafts, levers, swingarms) that interface
with other subsystems such as the printbar and service sled.
Sensors
Sensors
1. Output flap jam sensor

2. Ambient temperature sensor
3. Ambient humidity sensor
8. Tray 3 separation sensor
12. Tray 3 cleanout presence sensor
13. Top of Form (TOF) REDI sensor (located on platen)
Sensors
14. Feed roller encoder

15. Feed roller home sensor
16. Duplex module presence sensor
17. Print zone REDI sensor (located on platen)
18. Back-scatter drop detect sensor
19. Print calibration/Media edge detect sensor
20. Lower paper path REDI sensor
21. Left door open sensor
22. Upper paper path REDI sensor
23. Ink supply door open sensor
24. Eject REDI sensor
Motors
Paper-handling system motors
1. Eject (or output drive) motor

4. Duplex Tray 1 motor
5. Tray 3 feed motor
6. Feed motor
7. Optical carriage motor
8. Printbar lift motor
Input trays
The product comes standard with two input trays, and also accepts an accessory tray.
Tray 1—50-page multipurpose (MP) tray:
 Tray 1 shares a motor with the duplex module and has only one sensor.
 A reflective (REDI) sensor determines if media is present in the tray.
 The feed roller reflective REDI sensor determines if a sheet of media is
successfully picked from the tray.
Tray 2—500-sheet letter/A4 size main tray:
 Tray 2 has a pick motor, which is also moves the service sled.
 Similar to the accessory tray, both the main tray motor and the duplex MP tray
motor operate at the same time when picking paper from the main tray.
 A flag/opto sensor determines if the pick roller is in home position.
 The feed roller jam sensor is used to determine if a sheet of media is
successfully picked from the main tray.
Tray 3—Optional 500-sheet legal size accessory tray:
 Tray 3 has two motors, one for picking paper and one for the turn roller. This
roller receives paper from the pickup roller and transfers it to the multipurpose
tray ITR that is driven by the duplex module/MP tray motor.
 Both the accessory tray motor and the duplex module/MP tray motor operate
at the same time when picking paper out of the accessory tray
 A flag/opto sensor determines if the pickup roller is in the home position.
 A hall effect sensor determines if the left door is closed.
 A separation sensor determines if the product successfully picked media.
 Servicing system overview
Servicing system components
Service sled—Maintains print quality by wiping debris and ink off the print
nozzles.
Maintenance ink module—Where maintenance ink is deposited.
Service sled
The service sled system keeps the printbar nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the
product as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The service sled system uses the
pick drive system (a component of the paper path) for horizontal motion to perform its
functions.
Service sled system wiping and capping functions:
 Wiping function
The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and particulates.
To perform the wiping function, the product moves the service sled
underneath the printbar (which is elevated from the print position) so that the
Web fabric makes contact with the ink nozzles. The Web fabric works in the
form of a belt loop that advances after every wipe. Since the belt is a finite
loop, it will eventually reuse previously used material. The Web advances
when the Web wipe module moves to the right out of the print zone. The
advance mechanism is triggered by a mechanism located on the rear wall of
the unit.
 Capping function
The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage when the
product is idle.
To perform the capping function, the service sled moves underneath the
printbar (which is elevated from the print position), which allows the rubber
cap to seal the print nozzles from the environment.
Item Description
1 Service sled cap
2 Service sled wiping surface
3 Service sled Web fabric loop
4 Printbar support posts
Transmission system overview

The pick/service motor uses a multi-state transmission to power the following three
functions:
 Move the service sled

 Pick paper from the main tray
 Lift the main tray paper stack
The transmission has the following states:
 Service sled (forward/reverse)

 Pick (forward direction)/Tray Lift (reverse direction)
Printbar movement to a specific location releases the transmission lock, and enables the
pick/service motor to select the transmission state.
NOTE: The product will not function with the transmission in the main tray pick/main tray lift
state if the service station has been manually capped.
NOTE: Reusing caps or pushing the caps too far onto the printbar lift guide rods while
servicing the product can result in the transmission not shifting reliably.
Transmission system components
NOTE: The transmission components are behind the main PCA electronics and are difficult
to access.
Transmission system states
State 1—Main tray lift

 Lower swing arm down, engaged with main tray lift transmission
State 1—Main tray pick

 Lower Swing arm up, engaged with pick shaft
State 1—Mid-switch
 Link pivot arm and shift swing arm in unlocked position

 Upper swing arm in mid switch position
 Printbar in middle position
State 2—Service Station

 Upper swing arm up, engaged with service sled drive shaft
 Aerosol management system overview

 The aerosol management system consists of a fan module and filter box to keep ink
aerosol from building up inside the product. The following figure shows the service
ink and aerosol capture system components.


 In between pages, printed aerosol is drawn though the platen openings. Service ink
travels directly through the platen, impacting and collecting on the spit roller.
Aerosol from the service spitting is also collected via the same system. Service ink
collects in the duplex module, and a porous filter element captures the aerosol as
aerosol-laden air passes though it. The aerosol blower mounted to the filter housing
creates the air motion (suction—lower pressure—in the print zone).
 Most of printbar servicing ink (maintenance ink) is captured by the spit roller and
scraped into the bottom of the bucket on the duplex module. The service ink spit
roller is indexed slowly by the motion of paper though the product, specifically
driven by the swingarm and turn-roller gear train, with power provided by the duplex
motor.
 The product purges the printbar of its shipping fluid at initial startup, and then
absorbers in the base of the duplex module collect the fluid. These absorbers allow
much of the initial water to evaporate from the shipping fluid over time. Also, they
allow service ink coming into contact with the absorbers to leach some of their
fluids into them, assisting with drying and thickening of the sludge.
 The blower remains active as long as the printbar is uncapped, and it continues to
operate for a few seconds after capping is complete.
Aerosol management system components
1. Blower
2. Aerosol filter housing
3. Duplex module/maintenance ink
module
4. Platen
Document feeder overview

The document feeder applies only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
The following sections describe document feeder capabilities of the product:
 Operation
 Paper path and sensors
 Jam detection
 Standby
 In standby mode (paper-loading mode), the pickup roller is up and the stack-stop is
down, preventing the user from inserting the original document too far. When a
document is inserted correctly, the paper-present sensor detects its presence
 Pick
 When the document feeder receives a copy or scan command, the document
feeder motor engages the gear train to lower the pickup-roller assembly and raise
the stack-stop. The first roller, called the pre-pick roller, moves the top few sheets
forward into the document feeder. The next roller is the pickup roller. This roller
contacts the document feeder separation pad, which separates multiple pages into
single sheets.
 Feed
 The single sheet continues through the path. Along the way, the form sensor, which
is a set distance from the document feeder glass, detects the sheet. This alerts the
scanner to start when the page reaches the glass. The scanner acquires the image,
one raster line at a time, until it detects the end of the page. The page is then
ejected. The pick and feed steps are repeated as long as paper is detected in the
document feeder input tray
 Duplex
 When the product duplexes from the document feeder, the paper passes through
the document feeder three times. During the second instance, the product reverses
the page orientation and then scans it. During the third instance, the product returns
the page to the original orientation.
 Lift
 When no more paper is detected in the document feeder input tray and the form
sensor detects the trailing edge of the last page, the last sheet is ejected and the
motor turns in a sequence that lifts the pick-roller assembly to standby (paper-
loading) mode again.
 NOTE: The document feeder will not function when the document feeder cover is
open.
 NOTE: Lifting the scanner lid/document feeder from the glass during feeder
operation will result in a paper jam error.
 Document feeder paper path and sensors

 The following diagram shows the document feeder paper path during a two-sided
(duplexed) copy job. The paper enters the product from the document feeder input
tray and passes through the paper path for the first time. The product then pulls the
paper back through the path in order to reorient the page and scan the second side.
The paper then travels back to the end of the paper path, where it is pulled in one
more time to travel through the paper path in order for the product to reorient the
page again before sending it out of the paper path and pulling in the next sheet.


 The paper-present sensor determines if paper is in the document feeder input tray.
The form sensor detects the top and bottom edges of the document. One other
sensor detects an open document feeder cover.
Document feeder jam detection

The document feeder has two sensors that detect paper. The paper-present sensor detects
the presence of media in the document feeder input tray. The form sensor detects media
moving through the document feeder. If a jam is detected, the document feeder
immediately stops the paper feeding, initiates a jam clearing routine and a jam message
appears on the control-panel display.
A jam can be detected under any of the following conditions:
 Document-feeder jam: When documents are detected in the document

feeder input tray, and a command to copy, scan or fax is received, the
document feeder attempts three times, or for about 10 seconds, to advance
the paper to the form sensor. If the paper does not advance, the scan module
turns off and the ADF Misfeed message appears on the control-panel
display.
 Long-document jam: If the paper has advanced to trigger the form sensor,
but the trailing edge is not detected within the time allowed for a 381 mm (15
in) document (the maximum allowable page length for the document feeder),
the scan module turns off and the Paper Jam message appears on the
control-panel display.
 Stall jam: When a page that is less than 381 mm (15 in) long has advanced
to the form sensor but has not left it within the expected time, the paper has
probably stalled or jammed. The scan module turns off and the Paper
Jam message appears on the control-panel display.
 Other: If the paper stops in the document feeder and the scan module
remains under the document feeder scanner glass, an internal firmware error
has probably occurred and the Cannot Scan, Copy, or Fax message
appears on the control panel display. This is usually remedied by cycling the
power.
Scanner system
This topic applies only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
The flatbed image scanner captures an electronic image of the document on the glass. The
scanner does this by illuminating the document with LEDs (red, green, and blue) and
capturing the image in the image sensor to create an electronic format of the document.
The flatbed scanner consists of the following three main elements:
 CIS scanner: The CIS (contact image sensor) scanner captures an image
using the product's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs sequentially
illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of CCD sensors that cover
the entire page width. Because only one color is captured for each line per
exposure, the three colors are recombined electronically to create the full
color image. For monochromatic scans or copies, all three LEDs are
illuminated to create a white light for the scan so the raster line can be
captured in one exposure.
 Mechanical carriage drive: The carriage drive moves the CIS scan head
along the document length to create the image. In this product, a small DC
motor with an optical encoder creates this motion. The speed of the carriage
drive is proportional to the scan resolution (300 ppi is much faster than 1200
ppi) and also proportional to the type of scan (color scans are three-times
slower than monochromatic scans). A 1200 ppi color scan moves so slowly
that the product might appear to not be working, whereas a monochromatic
copy scan moves at 50 times that speed and will be somewhat noisy.
 Image processing system (formatter): The formatter processes the scanner
data into either a copy or a scan to the computer. For copies, the image data
is sent directly to the product without being transmitted to the computer.
Depending on user selections for the copy settings, the formatter enhances
the scanner data significantly before sending it to the product. Image data is
captured at 300 ppi for copies and is user selectable for scans to the
computer. Each pixel is represented by 8 bits for each of the three colors (256
levels for each color), for a total of 24 bits per pixel (24-bit color).
Fax functions and operation overview

Fax functions apply only to HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series models.
This section describes fax capabilities of the product:
 Security features
 PSTN operation
 Fax subsystem
 Fax card
Security features
The product can send and receive fax data over telephone lines that conform to public
switch telephone network (PSTN) standards. Secure fax protocols make it impossible for
computer viruses to be transferred from the telephone line to a computer or network.
The following product features prevent virus transmission:
 No direct connection exists between the fax line and any devices that are
connected to the USB or Ethernet ports.
 The internal firmware cannot be modified through the fax connection.
 All fax communications go through the fax subsystem, which does not use
Internet data-exchange protocols.
PSTN operation
The product generates and detects the signaling tones, currents, and data signals that are
required to transmit and receive faxes using the PSTN.
The following basic functions of PSTN operation are assumed in the design of the
fax subsystem:
 The PSTN operates through a central office (CO) that generates a constant
voltage on the TIP and RING wires (48 V, usually). A device goes off-hook by
connecting impedance (such as 600 ohms for the U.S.) across the TIP and
RING so that a line current can flow. The CO can detect this current and can
send impulses like dial tones. The product generates more signaling tones,
such as dialing digits, to tell the CO how to connect the call. The product can
also detect tones, such as a busy tone from the CO, that tell it how to behave.
 When the call is connected, the CO behaves like a piece of wire connecting
the sender and receiver. All fax signaling and data transfer occurs during this
period. When a call is completed, the circuit opens again and the line-current
flow ceases, removing the CO connection from both the sender and the
receiver.
 On most phone systems, the TIP and RING signals appear on pins 3 and 4 of
the RJ-11 modular jack (the one on the fax card, as defined in the common 6
wire RJ standard). These two signals do not have to be polarized because all
of the equipment works with either TIP or RING on one pin and the other
signal on the other pin. This means that cables of either polarity can
interconnect and still work.
 The fax subsystem

 The fax subsystem consists of the formatter, fax card, firmware, and software.
 It is designed to support V.34 fax transmission, medium speeds (such as V.17 fax),
and the lower speeds of older fax machines.
 Fax card overview

 The fax card contains the modem chipset (DSP and CODEC) that controls the
basic fax functions of tone generation and detection, along with channel control for
fax transmissions. The CODEC and its associated circuitry act as the third-
generation silicon data access arrangement (DAA) to comply with worldwide
regulatory requirements.
 Safety barrier
 The most important function of the fax card is the safety isolation between the high-
voltage, transientprone environment of the telephone network (TNV [telephone
network voltage]) and the low-voltage analog and digital circuitry of the formatter
(SELV [secondary extra-low voltage]). This safety isolation provides both customer
safety and product reliability in the telecom environment.
 Any signals that cross the isolation barrier do so magnetically. The breakdown
voltage rating of barrier critical components is greater than 5 kV.
 Protection circuitry
 In addition to the safety barrier, the fax card protects against over-voltage and over-
current events.
 Telephone over-voltage events can be either differential mode or common mode.
The event can be transient in nature (a lightning-induced surge or ESD) or
continuous (a power line crossed with a phone line). The fax card protection
circuitry provides margin against combinations of over-voltage and overcurrent
events.
 Common mode protection is provided by the selection of high-voltage-barrier critical
components (transformer and relay). The safety barrier of the fax card PCB traces
and the clearance between the fax card and surrounding components also
contribute to common mode protection.
 A voltage suppressor (a crowbar-type thyristor) provides differential protection. This
device becomes low impedance at approximately 300 V differential, and crowbars
to a low voltage.
 Data path
 TIP and RING are the two-wire paths for all signals from the telephone network. All
signaling and data information comes across them, including fax tones and fax
data.
 The telephone network uses DC current to determine the hook state of the
telephone, so line current must be present during a call. The silicon DAA provides a
DC holding circuit to keep the line current constant during a fax call.
 The silicon DAA converts the analog signal to a digital signal for DSP processing,
and also converts the digital signal to an analog signal for transmitting data through
a telephone line.
 The magnetically coupled signals that cross the isolation barrier go through a
transformer.
 The DSP in the fax card communicates with the ASIC in the formatter using the
high-speed serial interface.
 Ring detect
 Ring detect is performed by the line voltage monitoring module of the silicon DAA,
and is a combination of voltage levels and cadence (time on and time off). Both
must be present to detect a valid ring. The CODEC works with DSP as well as the
firmware to determine if an incoming signal is an answerable ring.
 Line current control

 The DC current from the CO needs to have a path to flow from TIP to RING. The
DC impedance emulation line modulator and DC terminations modules in the silicon
DAA act as a DC holding circuit, and work with the firmware to achieve the voltage-
current characteristic between TIP and RING. The impedance (the current-voltage
characteristic) changes corresponding to certain special events, such as pulse
dialing or when the product goes on-hook.

 Fax pages are the electronic images of the document page. They can be created in
any of three ways: scanned to be sent to another fax machine, generated to be sent
by the computer, or received from a fax machine to be printed.
 The product stores all fax pages in flash memory automatically. After these pages
are written into flash memory, they are stored until the pages are sent to another
fax machine, printed on the product, transmitted to the computer, or erased by the
user.
 These pages are stored in flash memory, which is the nonvolatile memory that can
be repeatedly read from, written to, and erased. The product has 2 MB of flash
memory, of which 1.5 MB is available for fax storage. The remaining 0.5 MB is used
for the file system and reclamation. Adding RAM does not affect the fax page
storage because the product does not use RAM for storing fax pages.
 Advantages of flash memory storage
 Fax pages that are stored in flash memory are persistent. They are not lost as a
result of a power failure, no matter how long the power is off. Users can reprint
faxes in case an ink cartridge runs out of ink or the product experiences other
errors while printing faxes.
 The product also has scan-ahead functionality that makes use of flash memory.
Scan-ahead automatically scans pages into flash memory before a fax job is sent.
This allows the sender to pick up the original document immediately after it is
scanned, eliminating the need to wait until the fax transmission is complete.
 Because fax pages are stored in flash memory rather than RAM, more RAM is
available to handle larger and more complicated copy and print jobs.
Troubleshooting overview
This section contains troubleshooting procedures that are available to customers along with
procedures that are intended for service and support personnel.
 Hidden menus and service modes

 Diagnostic tests
 Control panel messages
 Troubleshooting symptoms



unusable.
 Support menu
 Audit mode
They should NEVER be access by the end user.

3. Touch the Cancel button twice.
3. Touch the Back button twice.

1. Press and hold the ATM1 and ATM2 buttons while plugging in the product.


 Press and hold the ATM1 and ATM3 buttons while plugging in the product.

unusable.
 Support menu
 Audit mode
They should NEVER be accessed by the end user.


3. Touch the Home button twice to enter the Engineering menu.
NOTE: The Service menu is accessed from the Engineering menu.

 Touch the Back button four times consecutively to open the Support

menu.
NOTE: The Support menu is usually used by HP call center agents for assisting customers.

6. After a new screen appears, touch the Home button again to enter

MFG (off) mode.
NOTE: MFG mode is ONLY to be used by authorized service providers. It should NEVER


The product touchscreen is not active in this mode. Use the Home and Back
buttons on the control panel frame. These buttons are not illuminated until they are touched
with sufficient pressure. Locate these buttons by sweeping your finger over the general
areas.


7. Press the power button.
NOTE: Audit mode is ONLY to be used by authorized service providers. It should NEVER

Diagnostic tests overview

The following diagnostic tests are discussed in this section:
 Tap tests
 Print quality test
Performing a tap test

HP recommends the following tap tests:
 10 tap test—Out-of-box experience (OOBE) testing

 12 tap test—REDI sensor testing
 61 tap test—Alignment and color calibration testing
 909 tap test—BDD testing
To perform a tap test:
1. Open the Engineering Menu.

2. Touch Manufacturing Menu.
3. Use the arrow key to find the Reports Menu, and then touch OK.
4. Use the arrow key to find Print-mech tap tests, and then touch OK.
5. Use the arrow key to find the tap test number.
6. 10 Tap test—OOBE testing

7. OOBE tap test results are found on the printed tap test results page at line number
68. Line 68 is in the following format:
8. 68. Startup complete: 1 255 1 2 0 0 0 0
9. Use the following table to interpret these numbers:

n
1 DSID_PEN_PRINTER_STARTUP_BITS A value of 1 indicates

that the printbar has been
started up. This means
that shipping fluid has
been removed from the
n
printbar and replaced

with ink. This is the
expected state for a
printer after initialization.
255–OOBE messaging
2 DSID_OOBE_STATE
complete.
1–SHF purge is complete

DSID_INK_SUPPLY_OOBE_COMPELT
3 and service wipes have
E
been enabled.

the OOBE printed
calibrations are complete.
OOBE printed
calibrations are in
4 DSID_CAL_OOBE_STATE
progress.
OOBE printed calibration
does not exist so no
printing/calibration for
OOBE is attempted.

pen height and beam
center have been
completed, and that BDD
5 DSID_IQ_LIST_INDEX is scheduled (or pending)
to perform normally.
NOTE: For 1315FR
firmware and above.
6 DSID_BDD_FAIL_MASK 0–internal use only.

n
DSID_IDS_FIRST_CHARGE_REQUIRE
7 0–internal use only.
D
A value of 0 indicates
that OOBE calibrations
(not IQ calibrations) are
complete. This is so the
messaging is complete for
the calibrations. For
example, if this value is
8 DSID_PRINTHEAD_CAL_NEEDED
0, but the
CAL_OOBE_STATE =1,
you will get the printed
OOBE calibrations, but
the control panel may
display Preparing instea
d of Calibrating.
guide.
11. 12 Tap test—REDI sensor testing

12. Use the following table to interpret the REDI sensor tap test results:
Report area Item Acceptable values
Print Humidity Sensor

Stable Relative Humidity 0–100 RH.
Data
Pen TSR Ambient Pen TSR Ambient ± 10 °C of current

Temperature Estimate Temperature x10 °C ambient temperature.
Digital Temperature Digital Temperature Sensor

± 10 °C of current
Sensor Ambient Ambient Temperature x10
ambient temperature.
Temperature °C
Print REDI Sensor TOF sensor, P value 1

Between 10 and 100.
Calibration Data
Print REDI Sensor

TOF sensor, M value 1
Between 25 and 380.
Calibration Data
1
“M” is a mirror result, “P” is blocked with paper.
guide.
14. 61 Tap test—Alignment and color calibration testing

15. NOTE: If you hold the up or down arrows down, the tap count will increment by 10,
or 100.
16. An acceptable 61 tap test has identical values for “Color scale (factory)” and “Color
scale (current)” parameters on the printed report areas. “Color scale (factory)” and
“Color scale (current)” will be identical after a main PCA replacement, but may not
be the same under other conditions. The values should also be identical after a
printbar replacement.
Tap test 909—BDD status testing

NOTE: If you hold the up or down arrows down, the tap count will increment by 10, or 100.
An acceptable 909 tap test has the following values:
 BDD is operating
 Cal OOBE is complete state = 2
 Cal IQ is in progress, index = 1
NOTE: For future reference, this information can be found in the product troubleshooting
guide.
Performing a print quality test

To diagnose print quality problems using the Print Quality Page:
2. On the control panel, touch the Setup button.

3. Open the Print Reports menu.
4. Select Print Quality Report.
The Print Quality Page contains four bands of color, divided into the groups. By examining
each group, you can isolate a print quality problem to a particular ink cartridge.
In general, if the ink system is working correctly, all the color bars are present and not
streaked. Each bar has three distinct shades, but otherwise the color should not vary
across the bar. The bars should also be evenly lined up. The black text on the page should
not show ink streaks.
Print Quality defect examples

If dots or streaks appear in one or more groups, clean the printhead. If this does not
solve the problem, contact HP.
If streaks appear in multiple color bands, see if the problem still persists by performing
an additional print head cleaning, and then contact HP. A component other than the ink
cartridge is probably causing the problem.
Solutions to print quality problems are discussed in the troubleshooting section.
Print Quality defect examples:
 Color variation defect:
 Color intensity defect:
 Uneven bars (die misalignment):
 vertical dark lines:
 Vertical white lines on all bars:
 Vertical white lines on select bars:
 Gradations are not sharp:
Ink starvation:
Control panel messages and error codes overview
The following tables are provided in the Troubleshooting guide. Excerpts from the
tables are provided in this training. To view complete tables go to
:www.hp.com/support or the product troubleshooting guide.
 Front-panel error codes

 Control-panel messages
 Table of front panel error codes

 Font-panel error codes indicate the current product status or situations that might
require action.
 The following is an excerpt from the front-panel error codes table, for the full list of
error codes see the product troubleshooting guide or go to www.hp.com/support.
Front- Description Remote solution Onsite solution

panel
error code
If the room temperature

if below 5C or the
Service product was stored in an
6100000B station pen environment below 5C, Replace the printbar
too cold allow the product to
warm up. This can take
up to four hours.
Verify that the service

sled transmission is in
Service the correct position.
Turn the product off, then
6100000C Station Home Verify that the Web
on.
Failure wipe assembly is
installed correctly and
not racked.
6100000D Service Turn the product off, then Check the transmission
station cap on. springs. Verify that the
home long cam follower is
installed.
Replace the dwell gear
(usually will also have
610000C8 asserts to go
with ...0D).
Ensure that the
swingarms are engaged
Front- Description Remote solution Onsite solution
panel
error code
correctly.
Ensure that the printbar
is installed correctly.
That it is not racked.
Inspect the service sled

for debris (screws,
plastic tabs, etc.)
blocking its path.
If the carriage is
blocking the service
sled, inspect the path
between the carriage
and the carriage garage
Service for debris blocking the
Turn the product off, then
6100000E station cap path.
on.
home short
Use the Carriage
function in the support
test menu to confirm
correct operation of the
sensor carriage.
NOTE: The service
motor assembly is not
field replaceable.
Table of control-panel messages

The following is an excerpt from the control-panel messages table, for the full list of
control-panel messages see the product troubleshooting guide or go to
www.hp.com/support.
WARNING! Whenever turning the product off for servicing, wait 5 seconds, and then
remove the power cord before attempting to service the product. If this warning is not
followed, severe injury can result, in addition to damage to the product.
Message Description Remote Onsite solution
solution
The product needs Replace the

the setup ink cartridges with
Use
cartridges that came the setup ink
SETUP
with the product to cartridges that
cartridges
perform the initial came with the
setup process. product.
The setup cartridges

Remove those
that came with the
Do not use cartridges and
product cannot be
SETUP then install non-
used after the
cartridges setup
product has been
cartridges.
initialized.
 Ensure the service

sled is properly
inserted. Check
for rub points.
 Check the printbar
shims. They
should not be
stuck. The
printbar shims
are metal shims
located beneath
Turn the the printbar
Service
product off,  Check to make sure
Motor Stall
then on. that the lead in
ramps on the
edge of the
printbar head are
present and, if
not, find them.
NOTE: The service station

motor is not field
replaceable. Return the
product to an authorized
HP service center.
Ink The product has Replace the

Message Description Remote Onsite solution
solution
detected that a cartridge

cartridge
cartridge is missing indicated in the
problem
or damaged. error message.
Troubleshooting flowchart
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
 Are supply items within their rated life?

 Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in
good condition.
The following flowchart highlights a general process to quickly isolate and solve product
hardware problems:
Is the product on and

Verify the power is on
does a readable
Step Power and
message appear on Test the control panel
1 electronics
the control panel
Check network connections
display?
To find solutions to control panel

error messages, go
to :www.hp.com/support or the
Control Are there any error
Step product troubleshooting guide to
panel messages displayed
2 see the following tables:
messages on the control?
Control-panel messages
Panel error codes
Open the menu and

print the If accessories that are installed are
Step Information configuration pages not listed on the configuration
3 pages to verify that all the page, remove the accessory and
accessories are reinstall it.
installed.
Step Image Does the print quality Run a print quality diagnostic test
4 quality meet requirements? and evaluate. See the product
troubleshooting guide for more
information.
Make the paper is installed

Does the product correctly, tray guides must be set
Step Paper
pick up and move correctly, and supported paper
5 handling
paper successfully? sizes are used. See the product
user guide for more information.
Verify that all I/O cables are

connected correctly and that a
valid IP address is listed on the
Does the product Jetdirect configuration page.
Step print successfully If error messages display on the
Interface
6 from the host control panel when you try to print
computer? an event log, see the control-panel
messages table in the product
troubleshooting guide.
When the product prints successfully from the host computer, this is the end of the
troubleshooting process.
The following troubleshooting topics are covered in this section:
 Power and electronics

 Connectivity
 Paper handling
 Print quality
 Copy/scan (MFPs only)
 Fax (MFPs only)
 Memory device
Troubleshooting power and electronics overview

If the product does not power on, or a printer status page cannot be printed, use the
following steps to troubleshoot:
1. Verify that the product power is on

2. Test the control panel
3. Check network connections
If the printer status page can be printed, troubleshoot product connectivity

problems. If the product prints, but seems slow, try the following:
1. Make sure that the computer meets the minimum specifications for this
product. For a list of specifications, go to this Web site:
www.hp.com/support.
2. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are using,
change the setting to the correct paper type.
3. If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low
signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
4. If the product is in an environment that experiences high humidity, low
temperatures, or both conditions, the print speed might be affected.
Verifying the product power is on

To verify the product power is on:
1. Make sure that the product is plugged in and turned on, and the cables are
all connected correctly. The power button should be lit with a green light. If it
is not, press the power button. It should first glow with an amber color, and
then change to green once it is ready. If the power button does not light up,
check the following conditions:
o Make sure that the power cable is connected to the product and
the outlet.
o Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a
different outlet.
o If the power button is still not lit with an amber light when the
power button is pressed, then the power supply is likely faulty.
Replace the power supply.
o In rare cases, this symptom can be caused by a faulty main PCA.
2. If the amber light is on, the power supply is operating correctly. If the green
power light does not glow after pushing the power button, check the
following:
o There are two green LEDs on the main PCA that flash slowly
when the processors are operating correctly. If these LEDs are
not flashing slowly, then the main PCA is probably faulty.
o In rare cases, the power button assembly might be defective.
3. If the product motors do not rotate, make sure that the ink cartridges are
installed and that the doors are all closed. The control panel displays
messages to indicate these problems.
4. If the product powers up, but the control panel does not work, check the
following:
o Try printing a document. If the product can print, then the control
panel or control-panel FFC might be defective.
o If the product doesn’t print, then the main PCA might be defective.
Test the control panel

To test the control panel:
1. Open the Engineering menu.

2. Select the Service menu.
3. Select Service tests.
4. Run the following tests:
o Test Keys
o Test LEDs
o Test Display
5. If any of these tests fail, or if the control-panel FFC is damaged, replace the
control panel.
Checking network connections
To check network connections:
1. Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network
is active, the light is green.
2. Make sure you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to
the network.
3. Make sure that the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is
working correctly.
4. Verify the port settings:
o From the list of products on the computer, right-click the product

name, click Properties, and click the Ports tab.
o If using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure

that the product name listed on the Ports tab matches the
product name on the product configuration page.
o If using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network,

make sure that the box is checked next to Virtual printer port
for USB.
5. If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be

blocking communication with the product. Try temporarily disabling the
firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.
6. If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low
signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
Troubleshooting product connectivity problems overview

This section covers the following product connectivity troubleshooting topics:
 Solving USB direct-connect problems

 Solving network problems
 Solving wireless network problems
USB direct connect

If the product is connected directly to a computer, check the USB cable:
 Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
 Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
 Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product.
Replace the cable if necessary.
Network
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network.
Before beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the
product IP address that is listed on this page.
Physical connection:
1. Verify that the product is attached to the correct Ethernet port using the
proper cable.
2. Verify that cable connections are securely attached.
3. Check the ethernet port on the back of the product to verify that the amber
activity light and the green link-status light are active.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the network router,
switch, or hub.
IP address:
1. On the computer, open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify
that the current IP address for the product is selected. The product IP
address is listed on the product configuration page or through the control
panel.
2. If you installed the product using an HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box
labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
3. If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the
hostname instead of the IP address.
4. If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded the fully-
featured installer from the HP Web site, you can view or change the product
IP address using the following steps:
o Click Start.
o Click All Programs.
o Click HP.
o Click your product.
o Click Update IP Address to open a utility that reports the known

(“previous”) IP address for the product and allows you to change
the IP address, if necessary.
5. If the IP address is correct, delete the product entry from the list of installed
products, and then add it again.
Network communication:
1. Open a command-line prompt on your computer:
For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
2. Ping the product:
Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.

3. If the window displays round-trip times, the ping command was successful
and both the network and device are working.
4. If the ping command failed:
Verify that the network router, hubs, or switches are on.

Verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all
configured for the same network.
Link and duplex settings:
 HP recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting).

 If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.
Software compatibility:
1. Verify that new software programs are correctly installed.

2. Verify that new software programs use the correct print driver.
Workstation setup:
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection.
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
Network settings:
1. Review the network configuration page to check the status of the network
protocol.
2. Enable the network if necessary.
3. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
Wireless network overview

This section includes a Wireless connectivity troubleshooting checklist and
solutions to the following wireless network problems:
 The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product
has been turned off.
 The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes.
 The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall
installed.
 The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or
product.
 Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product.
 The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN.
 The network does not appear in the wireless networks list.
 The wireless network is not functioning.
Wireless connectivity checklist

Wireless connectivity checklist:
 Verify that the product and the wireless router are turned on and have power.
Also make sure that the wireless radio in the product is turned on.
 Verify that the service set identifier (SSID) is correct. Print a configuration
page to determine the SSID. If you are not sure that the SSID is correct, run
the wireless setup again.
 With secured networks, make sure that the security information is correct. If
the security information is incorrect, run the wireless setup again.
 If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on
the wireless network. If the network has Internet access, try connecting to the
Internet over another wireless connection.
 Verify that the encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the product
as it is for the wireless access point, such as a wireless router (on networks
using WPA security).
 Verify that the product is within the range of the wireless network. For most
networks, the product must be within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access
point (wireless router).
 Verify that obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal
objects between the access point and the product. Make sure poles, walls, or
support columns containing metal or concrete do not separate the product
and wireless access point.
 Verify that the product is located away from electronic devices that might
interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless
signal including motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other
wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.
 Verify that the print driver is installed on the computer.
 Verify the printer port.
 Verify that the computer and product connect to the same wireless network.
The wireless feature has been turned off

If the control panel displays the message “The wireless feature on this product has
been turned off”:
1. Touch the Setup button, and then touch the Wireless Setup menu.

2. Touch the Turn Wireless On/Off button, and then touch On.
The product does not print after wireless configuration

If the product does not print after the wireless configuration completes:
1. Make sure that the product is turned on and in the ready state.
2. Make sure you are connecting to the correct wireless network.
3. Print a Wireless Network Test from the Network Setup menu on the
control panel to make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
4. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected:
For products installed without the fully-featured installer:
o From the list of products on your computer, right-click the

product name, click Properties, and then open the Ports tab.
o Make sure that the box is checked next to Virtual printer port
for USB.
If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded

the fully-featured installer from the HP Web site, you can view or
change the product IP address using the following steps:
o Click Start.
o Click HP.
o Click the product.

5. Make sure that the computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the
computer.
The product does not print with a third-party firewall

If the product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed:
1. Update the firewall with the most recent update available from the
manufacturer.
2. If programs request firewall access when you install the product or try to
print, make sure to allow the programs to run.
3. Temporarily turn off the firewall, and then install the wireless product on the
computer. Enable the firewall the wireless installation is complete.
The product does not print after moving the router or the product
If the wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or product,
make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that the
computer connects to:
1. On the control panel, touch the Setup button, and then touch the Print
Reports menu.
2. Select Network Configuration Page.
3. Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the
SSID in the product configuration for the computer.
4. If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same
network. Re-configure the wireless setup for the product.
Cannot connect additional computers

If you cannot connect additional computers to the wireless product:
1. Make sure the computers are within the wireless range and that no
obstacles block the signal.
For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless
access point.
2. Make sure that the product is turned on and in the ready state.
3. Turn off any third-party firewalls on the computer.
4. Print a Wireless Test Report from the Network Setup menu on the control
panel to make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
5. Make sure that the correct port or product is selected:
For products installed without the fully-featured installer:
o From the list of products on your computer, right-click the

product name, click Properties, and then open the Ports tab.
o Make sure that the box is checked next to Virtual printer port
for USB.
If you installed the product using the CD installer, or downloaded

the fully-featured installer from the HP Web site, you can view or
change the product IP address using the following steps:
o Click Start.
o Click HP.
o Click the product.

6. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart your
computer.
Lose communication when connected to a VPN

If the wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN:
 Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list

The network does not appear in the wireless networks list:
 Make sure that the wireless router is turned on and has power.
 The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden
network.
The wireless network is not functioning

If the wireless network is not functioning:
1. Verify that the network has lost communication by trying to connect other
devices to the network.
2. Test network communication by pinging the network:
o Open a command-line prompt on the computer:
For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
o Ping the product:
Type ping followed by the IP address for the wireless router.
o If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
3. Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that the
computer connects to:
o From the product control panel, touch the Setup button,

and then touch the Print Reports menu.
o Touch Network Configuration Page.
o Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration

report to the SSID in the product configuration for the computer.
o If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to
the same network. Re-configure the wireless setup for the
product.
Troubleshooting paper handling problems overview

Always be sure that the paper is installed correctly. Paper tray guides must be set correctly,
supported paper sizes must be used, good quality paper–HP ColorLok is recommended.
See the product user guide for more information.
This section covers the following paper-handling troubleshooting topics:
 The product does not pick up paper

 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
 The product states that a paper tray is empty, even though it has paper
 The product makes grinding noises when feeding paper
 The output motor stalls
 The output flap won’t retract
 The product has frequent paper jams
The product does not pick up paper

If the product does not pick up paper from the tray:
1. Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper.
3. Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the
size of paper. Align the guides with the paper-size markings in the bottom of
the tray.
4. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees,
and flip it over. Do not fan the paper Return the stack of paper to the tray.
5. Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to
acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually through Tray 1, the multi-
purpose tray on the left side of the product. Load paper, and continue.
Onsite solutions
 On products that have seen a lot of use, the pick tire/separator pad might be
worn. Replace the pick tire/separator pad if they are worn.
 Verify that the pick shaft rotates. If the pick shaft does not rotate, check the
pick motor connectors to verify they are connected securely and undamaged.
Verify that the transmission operates correctly.
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray:
1. Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the
size of paper. Align the guides with the paper-size markings in the bottom of
the tray.
2. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees,
and flip it over. Do not fan the paper Return the stack of paper to the tray.
3. Make sure the paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
4. Make sure all paper in the tray is the same type and size.
5. Make sure the paper is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged, If necessary, use
paper from a different package.
6. Make sure that the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of
paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return less paper to the
tray.
Onsite solutions
 Replace the pick tire/separator pad.
The product states that a paper tray is empty when paper is loaded
If the product states that a paper tray is empty, even though it has paper:
1. Make sure the paper in the tray is adjusted correctly.
2. Verify that the correct tray is being selected.
Onsite solutions
 Make sure the tray lift mechanism on the tray is working:
o Remove the tray from the product. Remove the paper from the tray.
Push the ratchet mechanism on the back of the tray.
If the metal base of the tray does not lift up, replace the tray.
o Check the media presence sensor flag.
If the media presence sensor flag is broken or does not move

freely, replace it.
o Remove the rear cover and observe the tray lift mechanism while it
operates.
Make sure the return spring is in place and that the mechanism
moves freely.
 Replace the tray lift mechanism if it is defective.
The product makes grinding noises when feeding paper

If the product makes grinding noises when trying to feed paper, there might be an
obstruction in the paper path or a REDI sensor might be defective:
 Feed a sheet of stiff paper into the product to try to dislodge the paper path
obstruction.
Onsite solutons
 Verify that the service sled transmission is in the correct position.

 Check the REDI sensors.
Use an IR sensitive camera (most cell phone cameras work) to determine if

all the REDI sensors are operational.
You can also determine where a failed REDI sensor might be by how far the
paper gets through the paper path before a jam is signaled.
The TOF REDI and Print zone REDI are contained on the platen. The platen
is field replaceable.
The Lower paper path, upper paper path and Eject REDIs are all field
replaceable.
 If there is a sheet of paper at feed roller and the product sounds like it keeps
trying to repick the sheet, then lifts the tray, then tries to pick the paper again
several times:
o There might be a calibration issue with the TOF REDI (TOF
sensor). Recalibrate the REDI sensor through the Support menu.
o Verify that the print zone distribution cable (cable 17) is plugged in
correctly to J26 on main PCA and is not shorting.
o Verify that there is no damage to the cables.
The output motor stalls

If the output motor stalls:
 Clear any paper that might be blocking the output area.
Onsite solutions
 Verify that there is no debris blocking the eject gear module/eject flap
actuator.
 If the output flap opens, the encoder disc could be faulty. Replace the output
drive system.
 If the flap doesn’t open, the motor could be faulty. Replace the output drive
system.
 In very rare cases, the main PCA could be defective.
The output flap won’t retract

If the output flap does not retract:
 Turn the product off, then on.
Onsite solutions
 Verify that the output solenoid is not defective and the solenoid cable is
undamaged and securely connected.
 Verify that the output flap actuator is not defective.
 Verify that the output assembly is not defective. Replace the output assembly
if it is defective.
The product has frequent paper jams

General paper jam issues (onsite solutions):
 Make sure the FFCs for the Lower paper path, upper paper path, and eject
REDI sensors are undamaged and securely connected.
If any of these REDI sensors are defective, replace them.
 If the product states that there is a paper jam, but the paper is undamaged,
then it is most likely a REDI sensor, motor, or feed encoder issue.
The location of the suspect REDI can be determined approximately by how
far the paper moved through the paper path
 Recalibrate the REDI sensors.

 Verify that the feed motor/encoder is not defective.
 Verify that the FFCs at the feedshaft encoder PCA/print zone distribution PCA
are undamaged and securely connected.
 Verify that the motor connections on the main PCA (J5) are undamaged and
securely connected.
Replace the feedshaft encoder PCA. The feed motor is not replaceable.
Output tray jam errors (onsite solutions):
 Make sure the output flap sensor tab is not broken.
If the output flap sensor tab is broken, install a new output flap.
 Make sure the output flap sensor FFC is undamaged and securely connected.
 Verify that the output flap sensor is not damaged.
Replace the sensor/flap if the output flap sensor is damaged.

Frequent jams in the paper path (onsite solutions):
 Make sure that there are no star-wheels missing or damaged.

 Check components such as the duplex module to verify that the star-wheels
are intact and working properly.
 If a star-wheel is seized, free it. Otherwise, replace the assembly on which the
star-wheels are located.
Print zone jams

If paper was torn while clearing a print zone jam but the product still reports a jam in the
print zone, there might be scraps of paper obstructing the print zone. Verify that the TOF
void area is clear of any scraps of paper by running a heavy sheet of paper through it
(sometimes referred to as the “snowplow” method):
Clear the TOF area of paper scraps:
1. Touch or press the Home button.
2. Touch or press the Back button four times.

3. Select Support Menu.
4. Scroll to Print Diagnostics Menu, and then touch or press OK.
5. Select Clear paper jams.
6. Load a sheet of paper into tray 1 when the control-panel message prompts
you, and then touch or press OK.
7. After the paper feeds through the product the jam recovery process is
complete. Press the Cancel button until you return to the Home screen
Onsite solutions:
1. Clear the TOF area of paper scraps:
2. Recalibrate the TOF sensor emitter from the Service Menu.
3. Damaged contacts on the connector or improper insertion of the FFC could
cause shorting.
4. Replace the TOF sensor if it is defective.
5. Replace any damaged cables that might be shorting to metal.
6. Inspect the print zone distribution PCA solder ball for signs of shorting.
Replace the print zone distribution PCA (CN459-60083) if it is defective.
7. If the main PCA connector is defective, or the main PCA has a defective
component, replace the main PCA.
NOTE: Problems with the main PCA connector or components are

unlikely.
If paper will not feed into the product, the TOF REDI sensor might be defective or
disconnected.
If paper feeds into the print zone and a jam message is displayed, but there is no damage
to the paper or signs of an actual jam, then the either TOF REDI or Print Zone REDI sensor
might be faulty.
Troubleshooting print quality overview

This section covers the following troubleshooting topics:
 Ink cartridge specifications

 Paper specifications
 Paper settings
 Color settings
 Ink settings
 Cleaning ink smears
 Cleaning the printhead
 Incomplete alignment
If all troubleshooting tools and procedures fail, replace the printbar. When replacing the
printbar, check the condition of the service sled. HP recommends that the service sled be
replaced on products that have printed more than 30,000 pages.
If print-quality issues cannot be resolved the product must be serviced.
Ink cartridge specifications

CAUTION: The use of non-HP ink cartridges can damage the product printhead.
HP cannot guarantee the quality or reliability of non-HP cartridges or refilled HP cartridges.

If you are not using genuine HP cartridges, the print quality solutions provided might not
resolve your issue.
Use either of the following procedures to determine if you are using genuine HP cartridges.
To use the HP embedded Web server (EWS) to view the ink cartridge information:
1. Open the product's EWS, click on the Tools tab, and then select Ink Gauge
2. In the Installed Cartridges area, genuine HP ink usage is indicated by the
following:
o In the Part Number row, the ink cartridge part numbers begin with
the letters “HP”.
o The Type row contains an HP logo.
o The HP row has the value “0” or “00”.
NOTE: A value of “1” in the Use row indicates non-HP ink

usage.
To use the printer status report to view the ink cartridge information:
1. Print a printer status report.

2. Genuine HP ink usage is indicated by the following:
o Line 44 Use: the value for this line should be 0. A value of 1
indicates that a non HP supply is installed. This field is reset with
each supply change.
o Line 45 HP: the value for this line should be 1. A value of 1
indicates that an HP supply is installed. A value of 0 indicates that
a non-HP supply is installed. This field is reset with each supply
change.
o Line 48 NHIO: the value for this field should be 0 or 00. If the
value for this item is not 0 or 00, then a non-HP ink cartridge has
been installed in the product but not necessarily used. This field is
persistent, and not reset.
o Line 49 IRO: the value for this field should be 0 or 00. If the value
for this item is not 0 or 00, then a, non-HP ink cartridge has been
installed in the product and the user confirmed the message to
use the non-HP ink. This field is persistent, and not reset.
Paper specifications
Based on HP internal testing using a range of plain papers, HP highly recommends using
papers with the ColorLok® logo for this product. For details, go to
http://www.hp.com/go/printpermanence.
If HP ColorLok® paper is unavailable, use paper that meets HP specifications for this
product. Always use a paper type and weight that this product supports.
Use the following guidelines when selecting paper:
 Select paper that is designed for use in inkjet products.

 Generally, smoother paper results in better print quality.
 Make sure the paper is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots,
loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.
 Do not use paper that has been previously printed on.
Check the paper type setting in the print driver or select a different paper if you are
having any of the following problems:
 The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

 Specks of ink are on the printed pages.
 Ink is smearing on the printed pages.
 Printed characters seem misformed.
 Printed pages are curled.
Paper settings
Check the paper type setting if you are having any of the following problems:
 The ink is smearing on the printed pages.

 Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.
 Printed pages are curled.
 Printed pages have small unprinted areas.
To change the paper type and size setting for Windows:
1. From a software program that has the Print feature available, click on

the File menu, and then click Print.
6. Expand each category of paper types until you find the paper type that you
are using.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click OK.
To change the paper type and size setting for Mac:
1. On the menu in the software program, click the File option.

2. Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list.
3. Open the Paper/Quality menu.
4. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Color settings
Manage color by changing the settings on the Color tab (Windows) and Color Options tab
(Mac) in the print driver.
To improve print color:
 Verify correct print settings and paper quality.

 Try changing the color theme for the print job.
 Check environmental conditions.
Operating the product in a location that is very cold, or humid, could result in a
failure in the temperature/humidity sensor.
Perform tap test 12 to determine the status of the sensors, and, replace if
necessary.
NOTE: The HP EasyColor check box appears only in the PCL6 print driver. It is not
available in the universal print drivers.
Ink settings
The Ink settings can be adjusted if you are experiencing the following symptoms:
 Roller tracking
 Ink smearing
 Starwheel tracking
 Black ink is spreading into the adjacent color
NOTE: The need to adjust ink settings should be rare.

Before adjusting ink settings, check the following:
 Verify correct print settings and good paper quality.

 Check environmental conditions.
Operating the product in a location that is very cold, or humid, could result in a
failure in the temperature/humidity sensor.
Perform tap test 12 to determine the status of the sensors, and, replace if
necessary.
To adjust ink settings:
1. On the Printing Preferences tab click the Color tab,

2. Unselect the HP EasyColor option.
3. Click the Ink Settings button.
4. Adjust the Dry Time, Saturation, and Black Ink Spread settings as
needed.
NOTE: The HP EasyColor check box appears only in the PCL6 print driver. It is not

available in the universal print drivers.
The following ink settings can be adjusted:
 Dry Time
Increase the Dry Time setting to help resolve roller tracking, ink smearing,

and starwheel tracking.
Increasing the Dry Time setting will slow down the overall printing process
Changing the Dry Time setting is most effective when using plain paper.
 Saturation
Decrease the Saturation setting to help resolve roller tracking, ink smearing,

and starwheel tracking.
Decreasing the Saturation setting might cause fading in the printed output.
Increasing Saturation setting might make images look more vibrant.
The Saturation setting determines how much ink is used to achieve the print
job. This setting is a value in the range of -2 to 2. The default setting is 0.
Changing the Saturation setting is most effective when using brochure or
photo paper.
 Black Ink Spread
Adjusting the Blank Ink Spread setting can help control ink spread or wicking
on different types of media.
Decreasing the Black Ink Spread will improve areas where black and color
are adjacent if the black is spreading into the adjacent color.
The Black Ink Spread setting can be changed to one of the following values:
o Default: This value is the default black ink spread setting.
o Less: This value sets the ink spread at about halfway

between Default and Least.
o Least: This value imposes the most control on black ink spread.
Cleaning Ink smears

In some cases, maintenance ink can persist through cleaning efforts. Check that the
problems aren’t being cause by ink somewhere in the system.
Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess ink from the printhead and paper
path if you are having any of the following problems:
 Specks of ink are on the printed pages.

 Ink is smearing on the printed pages.
 Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.
Use the following procedure to clean ink smears:
2. On the control panel, press or touch the Setup button.

3. Open the Tools menu.
4. Select Clean Ink Smear
5. Press or touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.
A page feeds through the product slowly. Retain this page for print quality evaluation.
If print jobs are showing ink smears on the back of the page:
 Remove the duplex module and then reinstall it. Black ink can build up on the
duplex module on products that have been used heavily (over 100,000 pages
of printed output).
 The platen might have an ink buildup. Run a few sheets of blank (no
text/graphics) thick paper through the product to clean the platen.
 Check the ink service station level.
 If the error persists, service the product.
To check the ink service station level:

1. Open the Support Menu by pressing the Back button four
consecutive times.
2. Scroll to the System Configuration Menu.
3. Select Service ink container or Duplex module.
4. Select View current status.
Inspecting the ink cartridges for damage

Ink cartridges should be cleaned and inspected for damage if any of the following
control-panel messages appear:
 Ink Cartridge failure

 Problem with SETUP cartridges
 Ink Cartridge problem
If cleaning the ink cartridges does not clear the error message, use the following
steps to inspect the ink cartridge for damage:
1. Remove the ink cartridge from the product, and verify that there is no debris
in the cartridge path.
2. Examine the metal connector of the ink cartridge.
CAUTION: Do not touch the metal connector on the edge of the

cartridge. Fingerprints on the metal connector can cause print-quality
problems.
3. If you see any scratches or other damage on the metal connector, replace
the ink cartridge.
4. If the metal connector does not appear to be damaged, push the cartridge
gently back into its slot until it locks in place. Print a few pages to see if the
problem has resolved.
If any of the control-panel messages appear while the product is being installed, and the
product initialization hasn’t completed, then the setup cartridge much be replaced with
another setup cartridge. If the customer cannot wait for a new setup cartridge to be
delivered, it is possible to override the use of setup cartridges, and use trade cartridges. In
this case, you must use full XL cartridges
Use the following steps to override the use of setup cartridges:
1. Open the Support menu.
2. Select System Config, and then select Trade at OOBE
3. Make sure all doors and trays are closed.
4. Unplug the product, wait 30 seconds, and then plug the product back in.
5. If trade supplies are being used with an override to initialize, replace any
cartridges that feel light or might be empty.
-or-
Touch OK when the Startup Routine Ink Alert message appears
-or-
If a Depleted or Printer Failure message appears, replace with new setup
cartridges, or override to startup with (different) trade cartridges.
6. If message reappears, service the product.
NOTE: If the message clears and the product successfully initializes, the cartridge might
show low on ink.
Cleaning the printhead overview

Clean the printhead If print quality diagnosis shows any of the following defects on
the Print Quality Report:
 Color variation: ink mix across bar

 Color intensity: ink mix variation across bars
 Uneven bars: die misalignment
 Vertical dark lines
 Vertical white lines on all bars
 Vertical white lines on select bars
 Shade gradations are not sharp
 The page is blank or only partially printed
Printhead cleaning phases

The printhead cleaning process consists of three phases. Run a Print Quality diagnostic
test at the end of each phase. You are prompted to check the Print Quality Report, and
continue onto the next section if the problem is not solved. The printhead cleaning process
takes approximately 30 minutes to complete.
Printhead cleaning phases:
 Phase 1: Spit, BDD 1 calibration

 Phase 2: Prime, Service, Wipe, BDD 2 calibration
 Phase 3: Align and density calibration
If the printhead cleaning process is interrupted, for example by a power outage or an error
condition, when the process is started again it will attempt to start where it was interrupted.
Printhead cleaning procedure

TIP: Number each of the print quality pages so you don’t lose track of the prints later.
To clean the printhead:
2. On the control panel, press or touch the Setup button.

3. Open the Tools menu.
4. Select Clean Printhead.
5. Press or touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.
6. If you finish the cleaning process and still see defects on the Print Quality
Report, retry cleaning, especially if you have seen improvement in the Print
Quality Reports.
7. If the Print Quality Report still shows defects after a second cleaning, service
the product.
NOTE: If the print quality report has no defects, then the ink system is working correctly.
There is no reason to clean the printhead, which unnecessarily wastes ink and paper.
All colors are experiencing poor print quality
If all colors are experiencing poor print quality, there might be an issue with the Web wipe
not advancing. Open the left door, and then mark the edge of the Web wipe above the
duplex module.
Run the product so that it performs a wipe, and then see if the Web has advanced. If it has
not, replace the Service sled assembly using the service sled kit (part number CN598-
67021).
Reappearing color mix issues
Use the printhead recovery procedure if a color mix issue reappears after printhead
cleaning, when one of the following is true:
 Prior to the print quality problem, the product was unused for more than three
weeks.
 The product was recently moved or experienced a large temperature shift.
 There was a recent paper jam.
 The print quality problem seems to be getting better as the product is used
(especially if prints with dense backgrounds are printed).
To perform a printhead recovery:
1. From the Home menu, touch the Back button four times consecutively.
3. Open the Printhead Diagnostic Menu, and then select Printhead
Recover.
-or-
Open the Reports menu, select Print Mech Button Tap, and then
select 23 to perform a 23 Tap test. A printhead recovery is performed as part
of the 23 Tap test.
4. Press or touch OK.
IMPORTANT! Never perform the printhead recovery procedure more than two times in one
day. Excessive printhead recovery wastes ink and can result in ink leaks.
Deprime or starvation
If the defect on the Print Quality Report shows deprime or starvation:
1. Before cleaning the printhead make sure that the ink cartridge has ink and
the cartridges are installed correctly.
2. If print quality improves after the first phase of printhead cleaning, continue
to the second phase.
3. If print quality does not improve after the first phase of printhead cleaning,
service the product.
4. Nozzle problems
5.
6.
7. Nozzle problems can cause streaks, wrong colors, and other poor quality copy
problems. If experiencing nozzle problems, clean the printhead.
Incomplete alignment
Print a printer status page. The results of these calibrations is listed in row 69 of the printer
status page. If the number of successful calibrations is zero, or if you think that the last
calibration effort failed, then run a pen alignment calibration and/or printhead die
density calibration.
To perform a Pen Alignment Calibration or Printhead die density calibration:
1. From the Home menu, touch the Back button four times consecutively.
3. Open the Printhead Diagnostic Menu, and then select Printhead
Calibration.
4. Select either Pen Alignment Calibration or Printhead die density
calibration.
NOTE: These calibrations are also implicitly called in the Clean Printhead tool, and this
would be the way a typical user would invoke calibrations. This method should only be
used for service tech test/troubleshooting.
Scratches on the paper
Diagnosing scratches on the paper:
 It is very difficult to determine whether white lines on a page, especially on

thicker paper, are caused by printing issues or a scratch caused by a
mechanical issue.
 Unless you are very sure the white line is a scratch caused by a mechanical
issue, clean the printhead.
 If you continue to experience a white vertical line, the problem could be
caused either by a stuck starwheel, or a piece of debris stuck somewhere
along the paper path. Inspect the paper path. The location of the issue can be
determined by the location of the line on the page.
 If the white line only appears on one page of a duplexed output, then the
stuck starwheel or debris is likely on the duplex module.
 If white lines still appear in printed output after the printhead and ink smears
have been cleaned, the cause of the white lines could be a shim whisker. A
shim whisker is a piece of fiber (such as carpet fiber or hair) adhering to either
the printhead or to the shims underneath the printhead. On denser images, it
can also result in ink drips/smearing on the page. This issue typically appears
with products with high page counts that operate in dirty environments. If shim
whiskers are suspected, use an Advanced Cleaning Kit (part number CN459-
67006). This is normally the last step before servicing the product to solve this
issue.
To use the Advanced Cleaning Kit:
1. From the Setup menu, select Tools, and then select Advanced Cleaning.

2. Load the cleaning sheet included in the Advanced Cleaning Kit into the
product, and then touch OK.
The cleaning sheet feeds through the product slowly, about two inches per
second.
3. The cleaning sheet might need to be run through the product more than
once to remove the fiber.
NOTE: The cleaning sheet must be run through the product with the correct orientation.
The foam pad should be closer to the left side of the paper tray. If the cleaning sheet is run
through with the wrong orientation, it will still work, but there is the possibility of an output
paper jam.
Troubleshooting copy problems overview

This section covers the following troubleshooting symptoms:
 The document feeder is not operating correctly

 No copy came out
 Copies are blank
 Documents are missing or faded
 The copy size is reduced
 Copy quality is poor
 Copy defects are apparent
 The product prints half a page, and then ejects the paper
 Paper mismatch
The document feeder is not operating correctly

Solution:
 Unable to load paper fully in the document feeder input tray
The document feeder pick wheel might be stuck. Open the document feeder
cover and rotate the exposed gear counterclockwise (when viewed from the
front of the product).
 The document feeder is not pulling paper through the unit
the document feeder pick wheel might be stuck. Open the document feeder
cover and rotate the exposed gear clockwise (when viewed from the front of
the product).
 A control panel message indicates a misfeed
Make sure that the paper is loaded in the document feeder input tray
correctly.
Adjust the paper guides so that they align the paper correctly.
 The paper is feeding too slowly
The document feeder motor might have overheated.

Avoid using the document feeder for about an hour to let the motor cool, and
then try a job from the document feeder.
 The document feeder motor does not rotate
Open the document feeder cover and remove any packing material or
shipping tape.
No copy came out

Solution:
 Check the power. Make sure that the power cord is securely connected, and
the product is powered on.
 Check the control panel display for information about the status of jobs. The
product might be busy with another job. Wait for any job that is processing to
finish.
 Check for paper jams. The product might be jammed.
 Check the trays. Make sure that paper is loaded.
Copies are blank

Solution:
 Check the media. The media might not meet HP media specifications. For
example, the media is too moist or too rough.
 Check the settings. The contrast setting might be set too light. Use the Copy
button on the product control panel to create darker copies.
 Check the trays. If you are copying from the document feeder, make sure the
originals have been loaded correctly.
Documents are missing or faded
Solution:
 Check the media. The media might not meet HP media specifications. For
example, the media is too moist or too rough.
 Check the copy settings. The General Office mode, which produces draft-
quality copies, might be responsible for missing or faded documents. Change
to the Presentation or Professional setting.
 Use the Copy menu to adjust the brightness of the copy. The accuracy of the
copy depends on the quality and size of the original. If the original is too light,
copying will not improve the quality of the copy even if you adjust the contrast.
 Colored backgrounds might cause images in the foreground to blend into the
background, or the background might appear in a different shade.
 If you are copying a borderless original, load the original on the scanner
glass, not the document feeder
 If you are copying a photo, make sure you load it on the scanner glass as
indicated by the icon on the scan bed.
The copy size is reduced

Solution:
 Check the settings for the copy job. Reduce/enlarge or another copy feature
might have been set from the product control panel to reduce the size of the
scanned image.
 Change the settings. The HP photo and imaging software settings might be
set to reduce the scanned image. For more information, see the onscreen
Help for the HP photo and imaging software.
Copy quality is poor

Solution:
 Check the quality of the original.

 Make sure the media is loaded correctly to avoid skewing, which can cause
unclear images.
 Make sure that the scanner lid is closed properly.
 Clean the scanner glass or lid backing, if necessary.
 Clean the document feeder, if necessary.
 Print a print quality page. Check for nozzle problems that can cause streaks,
wrong colors, and other poor quality copy problems.
 Recalibrate the scanner.
To recalibrate the scanner:
1. Turn off the product and unplug the power cable.

2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Reattach the power cable.
4. Make sure that the scanner lid is closed.
5. Turn on the product. The scanner will calibrate during the startup process.
Copy defects are apparent

Solution:
 Vertical white or faded stripes
The media might not meet HP media specifications. For example, the media
is too moist or too rough.
 Too light or dark.
Adjust the contrast and copy-quality settings.
 Unwanted lines
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner

glass or lid backing.
Clean the scanner glass, lid backing, and frame.
 Black dots or streaks
Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner

glass or lid backing.
Clean the scanner glass, lid backing, and frame.
 Copy is slanted or skewed
Make sure the document feeder input tray is not too full.
Make sure the guides are snug against the sides of the media.
 Unclear text

The default enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the
setting and change it to enhance text or photographs, if needed.
 Incompletely filled text or graphics:
 Large, black typefaces look splotchy (not smooth)
 Horizontal grainy or white bands in light-gray to medium-gray areas

The product prints half a page, and then ejects the paper
Solution:
 Check the ink cartridges. Replace the ink cartridges, and then resend the print
job to the product.
Paper mismatch
Solution:
 Check the settings. Verify that the loaded media size and type match the
control panel settings.
Troubleshooting scan problems overview

This section covers the following troubleshooting symptoms:
 The document feeder is not operating correctly

 Nothing was scanned
 The scan takes too long
 Part of the document did not scan or text is missing
 Text cannot be edited
 Error messages display
 Scanning second-generation photos or pictures
 Scanned image quality is poor
 Scan defects are apparent
 The product prints half a page, and then ejects the paper
 Paper mismatch
 The Scanner bulb does not light during copying, scanning, or faxing.
The document feeder is not operating correctly

Solution:
 Unable to load paper fully in the document feeder input tray
The document feeder pick wheel might be stuck. Open the document feeder
cover and rotate the exposed gear counterclockwise (when viewed from the
front of the product).
 The document feeder is not pulling paper through the unit
the document feeder pick wheel might be stuck. Open the document feeder
cover and rotate the exposed gear clockwise (when viewed from the front of
the product).
 A control panel message indicates a misfeed
Make sure that the paper is loaded in the document feeder input tray
correctly.
Adjust the paper guides so that they align the paper correctly.
 The paper is feeding too slowly
The document feeder motor might have overheated.

Avoid using the document feeder for about an hour to let the motor cool, and
then try a job from the document feeder.
 The document feeder motor does not rotate
Open the document feeder cover and remove any packing material or
shipping tape.
Nothing was scanned

Solution:
 Check the original. Make sure the original is placed on the scanner glass
correctly.
 Check the product. The product might be coming out of Sleep mode after a
period of inactivity, which delays processing a short while. Wait until the
product displays the Home screen.
 If you can see the scan bar positioned in the middle or at the right side of the
scanner bed, turn off the product, and then turn it back on. The scan bar
should return to the left side of the scanner bed.
The scan takes too long

Solution:
 Check the resolution
If necessary, lower the resolution to scan more quickly.

If the resolution too high, the scan job takes longer and results in larger files.
To obtain good results when scanning or copying, do not use a resolution that
is higher than needed
 Scan in black and white
If you acquire an image through a program using the TWAIN driver, you can
change the settings so that the original scans in black and white.
For more information, see the onscreen Help for the software program.
 Check the product status
The printing and scanning processes share memory, which means that the
scan might be slower.
Part of the document did not scan or text is missing
Solution:
 Check the original:
o Make sure the original was loaded correctly
o If you scanned the document from the document feeder, try

scanning the document directly from the scanner glass.
o Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend

into the background. Try adjusting the settings before you scan the
original, or try enhancing the image after you scan the original.
 Check the settings:
o Make sure the input media size is large enough for the original that
you are scanning.
o If you are using the HP photo and imaging software, the default
settings in the HP photo and imaging software might be set to
automatically perform a task other than the one that you are
attempting. See the onscreen Help for the HP photo and imaging
software for instructions about changing the properties.
Scanned text cannot be edited

Solution:
 Check the settings:
o Make sure the OCR software is set to edit text.
o When you scan the original, ensure that you select a document
type that creates editable text. If the text is classified as a graphic, it
is not converted to text.
o Your OCR program might be linked to a word-processing program

that does not perform OCR tasks. For more information about
linking programs, see the product software Help.
 Check the original:
o Make sure the original media correctly placed on the scanner glass.
o The OCR program might not recognize text that is tightly spaced.
For example, the OCR program might combine the characters r
and n (“rn“) into “m”.
o The accuracy of the OCR program depends on the image quality,
text size, and structure of the original and the quality of the scan
itself. Make sure the original has good image quality.
o Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend

too much. Try adjusting the settings before you scan the original, or
try enhancing the image after you scan the original. If you are
performing an OCR operation on an original, any colored text on
the original does not scan well, if at all.
Error messages
“Unable to activate TWAIN source” or “An error occurred while acquiring the image”
Solution:
 Make sure the other device is TWAIN-compliant if acquiring an image from

another device, such as a digital camera or another scanner, Devices that are
not TWAIN-compliant do not work with the product software.
 Make sure the USB device cable is connected to the correct port on the back
of the computer.
 Verify that the correct TWAIN source is selected. In the software, check the
TWAIN source by selecting Select Scanner on the File menu.
The original is a second-generation photo or picture

Reprinted photographs, such as those in newspapers or magazines, are printed by using
tiny dots of ink that make an interpretation of the original photograph, which degrades the
quality. Often, the ink dots form unwanted patterns that can be detected when the image is
scanned or printed or when the image appears on a screen. If the following suggestions do
not solve the problem, you might need to use a better-quality version of the original.
Solution:
 To eliminate the patterns, try reducing the size of the image after scanning.
 Print the scanned image to see if the quality is better.
 Make sure the resolution and color settings are correct for the type of scan
job.
 For best results, use the scanner glass for scanning rather than the document
feeder.
Scanned image quality is poor

Solution:
 Use the glass to scan rather than the document feeder.

 Use high-quality originals.
 Place the media correctly. If the media is placed incorrectly on the scanner
glass, it might skew, which causes unclear images.
 Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned
page.
 Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
 Clean the scanner glass.
 Recalibrate the scanner.
To recalibrate the scanner:
1. Turn off the product and unplug the power cable.

2. Wait 15 seconds.
3. Reattach the power cable.
4. Make sure that the scanner lid is closed.
5. Turn on the product. The scanner will calibrate during the startup process.
Scan defects are apparent

Solution:
 Blank pages: Make sure the original document is placed correctly. Place the
original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the upper-left corner
located in the lower-right corner of the scanner glass.
 Too light or dark: Try adjusting the contrast and copy-quality settings. The
original image might be very light or dark or might be printed on colored
paper.
 Unwanted lines: The scanner glass, lid backing, or frame might need
cleaning.
 Black dots or streaks: Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance
might be on the scanner glass or lid backing. Try cleaning the product.
 Copy is slanted or skewed: Make sure the document feeder input tray is not
too full and that the width adjusters are snug against the sides of the media.
The defect might be on the original media and not a result of the scanning
process.
 Unclear text: Adjust the contrast and copy-quality settings. The default
enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the setting and
change it to enhance text or photographs, if needed
 Size is reduced: The HP software settings might be set to reduce the size of
the scanned image. For more information about changing the settings, see
the product software Help.
 Horizontal grainy or white bands in light-gray to medium-gray areas: The
default enhancement setting might not be suitable for the job. Check the
The product prints half a page, and then ejects the paper
Solution:
 Check the ink cartridges. Replace the ink cartridges, and then resend the print
job to the product.
Paper mismatch
Solution:
 Check the settings. Verify that the loaded media size and type match the
control panel settings
The Scanner bulb does not light during copying, scanning, or faxing
Solution:
 Contact HP support.
Troubleshooting the Fax overview

Fax reports:
 Fax Test Report

 Fax Confirmation Report
 Fax Error Report
 Fax Last Transaction Report
 Fax Log
 Caller ID Report
If a Fax Report test fails, review the report for basic information about the error. For more
detailed information, check the report to see which part of the test failed.
Fax troubleshooting topics:
 The display always shows Phone Off Hook

 The product is having problems sending and receiving faxes
 The product is having problems sending a manual fax
 The product cannot receive faxes, but can send faxes
 The product cannot send faxes, but can receive faxes
 Fax tones are recorded on the answering machine
 The phone cord that came with the product is not long enough
 Color faxes do not print
 The computer cannot receive faxes (Fax to PC or Fax to Mac)
Fax Test Report

The fax test report checks the status of the product. Perform a fax test report after the
product is set up for faxing.
Before running a fax test make sure that the ink cartridges are installed properly, full-size
paper is loaded in the main tray, and the product is set up for faxing.
The fax test report performs the following checks:
 Tests fax hardware

 Checks the fax connection.
 Checks the port.
 Checks the phone cord.
 Checks for a dial tone.
 Checks for an active fax phone line.
The fax test report provides the following information:

 Pass/fail results for each of the fax setup tests.
 Current fax settings to help diagnose issues.
 Instructions on how to rerun the test.
Procedure for running a fax test:
1. On the control panel, open the Setup menu.

2. Open the Tools menu, and then touch Run Fax Test.
The product displays the status of the fax test and prints a report.
If the test passes and you are still having problems faxing, check the fax settings listed in
the report to verify the settings are correct. A blank or incorrect fax setting can cause
problems faxing.
If the fax test fails to run, the product might be busy with another task, or it might
have an error condition preventing it from running the fax test. If the test fails, check
the following possible issues:
1. Verify that the product is set up properly, and connected to a power supply
and to the computer. For more information on setting up the product, see the
user guide that came with the product.
2. Verify that the product is powered on. If it is not, press the power button.
3. Verify that the ink cartridges are installed correctly and the front door is
closed.
4. Verify that the product is not currently busy with another task. Check the
display. If the product is busy, wait until it completes the current task and the
run the fax test again.
5. Verify that the rear door is attached to the back of the product.
6. Verify that there are no error messages on the control panel display. If there
is an error message, resolve the problem and then run the test again.
Fax Confirmation Report

The fax confirmation report provides printed confirmation that a fax was successfully sent.
The default fax confirmation setting is Off.
Complete the following steps to enable fax confirmation:
1. On the control panel, open the Setup menu.

2. Open the Fax Setup menu, and then open the Advanced Fax Setup menu.
3. Touch Fax Error Report
4. Select one of the following options:
o On (Fax Send): Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax sent.
o On (Fax Receive): Prints a fax confirmation report for every fax
received.
o On (Send and Receive): Prints a fax confirmation report for every
fax sent or received.
o Off: Does not print a fax confirmation report. This is the default
setting.
Fax Hardware
Solution:
 Power off the product by using the power button located on the product
control panel, and then unplug the power cord from the back of the product.
After a few seconds, plug the power cord in again, and then power on the
product. Run the test again.
 Try to send or receive a test fax. If you can send or receive a fax successfully,
there might not be a problem.
 If you are running the test from the Fax Setup Wizard (Windows) or HP Fax
Setup Utility (Mac OS), make sure the product is not busy completing another
task, such as receiving a fax or making a copy. Check the display for a
message indicating that the product is busy. If the product is busy, wait until
the job is finished and the product is in the idle state before running the test.
 Check the phone cord. If you do not use the phone cord that came with the
product to connect the product to the telephone wall jack, you might not be
able to send or receive faxes. Connect the phone cord that came with the
product, run the fax test again. You might need to connect the supplied phone
cord to the adapter provided for your country/region.
 Phone-line splitters can cause faxing problems. A splitter is a two-cord
connector that plugs into a telephone wall jack. Try removing the splitter and
connecting the product directly to the telephone wall jack.
 After resolving a problem, run the fax test again to check if the product passes
the test and is ready for faxing. If the Fax Hardware Test continues to fail and
you experience problems faxing, contact HP Support at www.hp.com/support.
If prompted, choose the country/region, and then click Contact HP for
information on calling for technical support.
Fax Connection
Use this solution for any of the following fax connection failures:
 Fax Connected to Active Telephone Wall Jack

 Phone Cord Connected to Correct Port on Fax
 Using Correct Type of Phone Cord with Fax
Solution:
 Try to send or receive a test fax. If you can send or receive a fax successfully,
there might not be a problem.
 Use the phone cord supplied in the box with the product to connect to the
telephone wall jack. If you do not use the supplied phone cord, you might not
be able to send or receive faxes. After plugging in the phone cord that came
with the product, run the fax test again. You might need to connect the
supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for your country/region.
 Make sure the product is correctly connected to the telephone wall jack.
Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to the telephone
wall jack and the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the
product.
 Make sure the phone cord has a secure connection between the telephone
wall jack and the product.
 Phone-line splitters can cause faxing problems. Try removing the splitter and
 Connect a working phone to the telephone wall jack used for the product and
listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone, contact the telephone
company and have them check the line.
the test and is ready for faxing.
Dial Tone Detection

Solution:
 Other equipment, which use the same phone line as the product, might be
causing the test to fail. To determine if the other equipment is causing a
problem, disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test
again. If the product passes the Dial Tone Detection Test without the other
equipment connected, then one or more pieces of the equipment is causing
problems. Try adding them back one at a time and rerunning the test each
time, until you identify which piece of equipment is causing the problem.
 Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the product, and it is
securely connected to the telephone wall jack. Connect one end of the phone
cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end
to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. You might need to
connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for the
country/region.
 Make sure the product is connected to an analog phone line. To check if the
phone line is digital, connect a regular analog phone to the line and listen for
a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal sounding dial tone, the phone line
might be set up for digital phones. Connect the product to an analog phone
line and try sending or receiving a fax.
 Try connecting a working phone and phone cord to the telephone wall jack
used for the product and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a dial tone,
contact the telephone company and have them check the line.
 If the telephone system is not using a standard dial tone, such as the one
used by some PBX systems, the test might fail. This will not cause a problem
in sending or receiving faxes. Try sending or receiving a test fax.
 Check to ensure that the country/region setting is set appropriately. If the
country/region setting is not set or is set incorrectly, the test might fail, and
you might have problems in sending and receiving faxes.
the test and is ready for faxing. If the dial tone detection test continues to fail,
contact the telephone company and have them check the phone line.
Fax Line Condition

Solution:
 Other equipment, which use the same phone line as the product, might be
causing the test to fail. To determine if the other equipment is causing a
problem, disconnect everything from the phone line, and then run the test
again. If the product passes the Fax Line Condition Test without the other
equipment connected, then one or more pieces of the equipment is causing
problems. Try adding them back one at a time and rerunning the test each
time, until you identify which piece of equipment is causing the problem.
 Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the product, and it is
securely connected to the telephone wall jack. Connect one end of the phone
cord supplied with the product to your telephone wall jack and the other end
to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. You might need to
connect the supplied phone cord to the adapter provided for the
country/region.
 Make sure the product is connected to an analog phone line. To check if the
phone line is digital, connect a regular analog phone to the line and listen for
a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal sounding dial tone, the phone line
might be set up for digital phones. Connect the product to an analog phone
line and try sending or receiving a fax.
contact the telephone company and have them check the line.
 If the telephone system is not using a standard dial tone, such as the one
used by some PBX systems, the test might fail. This will not cause a problem
in sending or receiving faxes. Try sending or receiving a test fax.
 Check to ensure that the country/region setting is set appropriately. If the
country/region setting is not set or is set incorrectly, the test might fail, and
you might have problems in sending and receiving faxes.
the test and is ready for faxing. If the dial tone detection test continues to fail,
contact the telephone company and have them check the phone line.
The display always shows Phone Off Hook

Solution:
 The product is connected using the wrong type of phone cord. Make sure the
phone cord that came with the product is used to connect the product to the
wall jack. If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, use
a coupler and a standard phone cord to extend the length. Couplers can be
purchased at stores that carry phone accessories.
 Other equipment that uses the same phone line as the product might be in
use. Make sure any extension phones—phones on the same phone line, but
not connected to the product—or other equipment are not in use or off the
hook. For example, the product cannot send a fax if an extension phone is off
the hook, or if a computer dial-up modem is being used to send email or
access the Internet.
The product is having problems sending and receiving faxes

Solution:
 Make sure the product is powered on. Look at the display on the product. If
the display is blank and the Power light is not lit, the product is powered off.
Check if the power cord is firmly connected to the product and plugged into a
power outlet. Press the power button to power on the product.
 After powering on the product, HP recommends waiting five minutes before
sending or receiving a fax. The product cannot send or receive faxes while it
is initializing after being powered on.
 Make sure the product is connected using the phone cord that came with the
product, and it is securely connected to the telephone wall jack. Connect one
end of the phone cord supplied with the product to the telephone wall jack and
the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE at the back of the product. If using a
phone splitter, try removing the splitter and connecting the product directly to
the telephone wall jack.
call your local telephone company for service.
 Other equipment, which uses the same phone line as the product, might be in
use. For example, the product cannot send a fax if an extension phone is off
the hook, or if a computer dial-up modem is being used to send an email or
access the Internet.
 Check to see if another process has caused an error. Check the control panel
display or the computer for an error message that provides information about
the problem and its resolution. If there is an error, the product will not send or
receive a fax until the error condition is resolved.
 The phone line connection might be noisy. Phone lines with poor sound
quality (noise) can cause faxing problems. Check the sound quality of the
phone line by plugging a phone into the telephone wall jack and listening for
static or other noise. If you hear noise, turn Error Correction Mode (ECM) off
and try faxing again. For information about changing ECM, see the onscreen
Help. If the problem persists, contact the telephone company.
 If you are using a digital subscriber line (DSL) service, make sure that you
have a DSL filter connected or you will not be able to fax successfully.
 Make sure the product is not connected to a telephone wall jack that is set up
for digital phones. To check if the phone line is digital, connect a regular
analog phone to the line and listen for a dial tone. If you do not hear a normal
sounding dial tone, it might be a phone line set up for digital phones
 If using a private branch exchange (PBX) or an integrated services digital
network (ISDN) converter/terminal adapter, make sure the product is
connected to the correct port and the terminal adapter is set to the correct
switch type for the country/region, if possible.
 If the product shares the same phone line with a DSL service, the DSL
modem might not be properly grounded. This can create noise on the phone
line. Phone lines with poor sound quality (noise) can cause faxing problems.
Check the sound quality of the phone line by plugging a phone into the
telephone wall jack and listening for static or other noise. If you hear noise,
power off the DSL modem for at least 15 minutes, after which, power on the
DSL modem again and listen to the dial tone. If the phone line is still noisy,
contact the telephone company. For information on how to power off the DSL
modem, contact the DSL provider for support.
The product is having problems sending a manual fax

Solution:
 Make sure the telephone used to initiate the fax call is connected directly to
the product. To send a fax manually, the telephone must be connected
directly to the port labeled 2-EXT on the product.
 Use the keypad on the telephone to send the fax. The keypad on the product
control panel cannot be used to send a fax manually from a phone that is
connected directly to the product.
The product cannot receive faxes, but can send faxes

Solution:
 If using a distinctive ring service through the telephone company, make sure
that the Distinctive Ring feature on the product is set to match. If not using a
distinctive ring service, check to make sure the Distinctive Ring feature on
the product is set to All Rings.
 If Auto Answer is set to Off, faxes must be received manually.
 If there is a voice mail service on the same phone number used for fax calls,
faxes must be received manually.
 If the product shares the same phone line with other types of phone
equipment, such as an answering machine, a computer dial-up modem, or a
multi-port switch box, the fax signal level might be reduced. The signal level
can also be reduced if a splitter or connect extra cables are used to extend
the length of the phone line. A reduced fax signal can cause problems during
fax reception. To find out if other equipment is causing a problem, disconnect
everything except the product from the phone line, and then try to receive a
fax. If you can receive faxes successfully without the other equipment
connected, one or more pieces of the other connected equipment is causing
problems; try adding them back one at a time and receiving a fax each time,
until you identify which equipment is causing the problem.
 If there is a computer dial-up modem on the same phone line as the product,
check to make sure that the software that came with the modem is not set to
receive faxes automatically. Modems that are set up to receive faxes
automatically take over the phone line to receive all incoming faxes. As a
result, the product doesn’t receive fax calls.
 If there is an answering machine on the same phone line with the product,
check the following problems:
o Disconnect the answering machine and try receiving a fax. If faxing

is successful without the answering machine, the answering
machine might be causing the problem.
o Make sure the answering machine is set up properly with the

product, try connecting the answering machine directly to the
product.
o Make sure the product is set to receive faxes automatically.
o Make sure the Rings to Answer setting is set to a greater number

of rings than the answering machine.
o The outgoing message might be too long or too loud to allow the
product to detect fax tones, causing the sending fax machine to
disconnect. The machine might not have enough quiet time
following the outgoing message to allow the product to detect fax
tones. This problem is most common with digital answering
machines. Reconnect the answering machine and record your
outgoing message again. Record a message that is approximately
10 seconds in duration. Speak slowly and at a low volume when
recording your message. Leave at least 5 seconds of silence at the
end of the voice message. There should be no background noise
when recording this silent time. Try to receive a fax again.
The product cannot send faxes, but can receive faxes

Solution:
 The product might be dialing too fast or too soon. Insert pauses in the number
sequence. For example, if you need to access an outside line before dialing
the phone number, insert a pause following the access number. If your
number is 95555555, and 9 accesses an outside line, you might insert pauses
as follows: 9-555-5555. To enter a pause in the fax number you are typing,
touch Redial/Pause, or touch Space (#) repeatedly, until a dash (-) appears
on the display.
 Try sending the fax by using monitor dialing. This enables you to listen to the
phone line as you dial. You can set the pace of your dialing and respond to
prompts as you dial.
 The number entered when sending the fax is not in the proper format or the
receiving fax machine is having problems. To check this, try calling the fax
number from a telephone and listen for fax tones. If you cannot hear fax
tones, the receiving fax machine might not be powered on or connected, or a
voice mail service could be interfering with the recipient's phone line. You can
also ask the recipient to check the receiving fax machine for any problems.
Fax tones are recorded on the answering machine

Solution:
 When you have an answering machine on the same phone line that you use
for fax calls, try connecting the answering machine directly to the product. If
you do not connect the answering machine as recommended, fax tones might
be recorded on your answering machine.
 Ensure that the product is set to receive faxes automatically and that
the Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings to answer for the
product should be greater than the number of rings to answer for the
answering machine. If the answering machine and the product are set to the
same number of rings to answer, both devices answer the call and fax tones
are recorded on the answering machine.
 Set your answering machine to a low number of rings and the product to
answer in the maximum number of rings supported. (The maximum number of
rings varies by country/region.) In this setup, the answering machine answers
the call and the product monitors the line. If the product detects fax tones, the
product receives the fax. If the call is a voice call, the answering machine
records the incoming message.
The phone cord that came with the product is not long enough
If the phone cord that came with the product is not long enough, use a coupler and a
standard phone cord to extend the length. couplers can be purchased at any electronics
store that carries phone accessories.
Solution:
1. Connect one end of the phone cord supplied with the product to the coupler.
Connect the other end to the port labeled 1-LINE on the back of the product.
2. Connect a standard phone cord to the open port on the coupler and the
telephone wall jack.
Color faxes do not print

Solution:
 Make sure the Incoming Fax Printing option on the product control panel is

turned on.
The computer cannot receive faxes (Fax to PC or Fax to Mac)

Solution:
 The computer selected to receive faxes might be turned off. Ensure that the
computer selected to receive faxes is switched on at all times.
 Different computers might be configured for setup and receiving faxes and
one of them might be switched off. If the computer receiving faxes is different
from the one used for setup, both computers should be switched on at all
times.
 Fax to PC or Fax to Mac might not be activated or the computer might not be
configured to receive faxes. Activate Fax to PC or Fax to Mac and make sure
that the computer is configured to receive faxes.
Memory
The product cannot read the memory device
Check the memory device:
 Make sure the memory device is supported by the product.

 Some memory devices have a switch that controls how they can be used.
Make sure the switch is set so the memory device can be read.
 Inspect the ends of the memory device for dirt or material that closes a hole or
spoils a metal contact. Clean the contacts with a lint-free cloth and small
amounts of isopropyl alcohol.
 Make sure the memory device is working correctly by testing it with other
devices.
Check the memory device slot:
 Make sure the memory device is fully inserted into the correct slot.
 Remove the memory card (when the light is not blinking) and shine a
flashlight into the empty slot. See if any of the small pins inside are bent.
When the product is off, you can straighten slightly bent pins by using the tip
of a thin, retracted ballpoint pen. If a pin has bent in such a way that it touches
another pin, replace the memory card reader or have the product serviced.
 Make sure only one memory device has been inserted at a time in the slots.
An error message should appear on the control-panel display if more than
one memory device is inserted.
NOTE: If the product cannot read photos on the memory device, check the memory device.
It might be corrupt.

 Identify challenges associated with removing and replacing parts.

 Service the product.
Required tools
 #T10 TORX driver with a magnetic tip and a 152 mm (6 in) shaft length
 #T10 TORX driver with a magnetic tip and a 25 mm (1 in) shaft length
 Small flat-blade screwdriver
 Needle-nose pliers
 Tweezers
 ESD mat (if one is available) or ESD strap
 Penlight
 One-quarter inch nut driver (for use with the OfficeJet Pro X special tools kit)
NOTE: To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the
existing thread pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten. Do not overtighten. If
a self-tapping screw-hole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected
assembly.
CAUTION: While the use of a motorized screwdriver is recommended, the screwdriver
must have a torque limiter, and it must be set to a low torque.
Officejet Pro X Special Tools Kit

The OfficeJet Pro X special tools kit (part number CN598-67056) is required for
replacing the service sled and printbar assemblies.
The OfficeJet Pro X special tools kit contains the following parts:
 Ink supply door switch–used to tell the printer that the supply door is
closed when the front cover is removed.
 Printbar lift lock tool–used for lifting and holding the printbar.
NOTE: When mounted correctly and with the printbar already in the

up position, the printbar lift lock tool needs only to be held in place
while the service sled is removed. It locks the printbar in the up
position. If you need to raise the printbar, use a one-quarter inch nut
driver to turn the printbar lift lock tool counter-clockwise. Use
extreme caution when driving the printbar lift lock tool to raise
the printbar. Over-driving might break the lock tool.
 Service sled advance tool–used to remove and reinstall the service sled.
NOTE: Use a one-quarter inch nut driver to remove or install the

service sled.
Printbar dolly–used to support the printbar during removal and installation.
Advanced Cleaning Kit

The Advanced Cleaning Kit (part number CN459-67006) is used for resolving shim
whiskers print quality issues.
The Advanced Cleaning Kit contains the following items:
 Sheet cleaner - full mid

 Shim whisker kit Instructions
 Corrugated box
 Corrugated insert
Service approach
Make sure the product has the latest firmware installed for the initial installation of the
product. Certain repairs to this product also require updated firmware, as noted in this
training. Download firmware for this product at www.hp.com.
Use the Service Manual and the videos provided to assist in the product teardown. Replace
parts in the reverse order of their removal. The Service Manual details the teardown steps
to get to a specific component, and provides steps on how to replace the component. The
Service Manual also includes directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures.
NOTE: The videos in this section begin with the print cartridges and input trays having
already been removed.
General FFC caution:
 Use caution when handling flat flexible cables (FFC). FFCs can be damaged
easily during product service and repair.
 Be careful when removing FFCs from connectors.
 Do not unnecessarily bend or pinch FFCs.
 Verify FFCs are properly seated during reinstallation. Sometimes it is difficult
to determine if a FFC is fully seated in a connector.
CAUTION: Failure to fully seat an FFC into a connector can cause a short circuit in a PCA.
Electrostatic discharge caution:
 Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD
reminder when removing product parts.
 Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an
ESD workstation or mat is not available, ground yourself by touching the
sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
 Protect the ESD-sensitive parts by placing them in ESD pouches when they
are out of the product.
Before performing service:
 Remove all media from the product.

 Turn off the power using the power button.
 Unplug the power cable and all interface cables.
 Remove the output bin.
 Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap if one
is available. If an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground
yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before touching an ESD-
sensitive part.
 RemoveTray 2 cassette.
 Remove the duplex module, which is located inside the left door.
After performing service:
 Plug in the power cable.

 Reinstall the output bin.
 Reinstall the ink cartridges (if they were removed prior to performing service).
 Reinstall the Tray 2 cassette.
 Reinstall the duplex module.
 Load paper in the product.
Post-service check:
1. Verify that the necessary reassembly steps have been completed.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn
on the product.
4. Verify that the expected startup sounds occur.
5. Print a configuration page, and verify that the expected printing sounds
occur.
6. Print a print-quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks,
banding, or other print quality defects.
7. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output
meets expectations.
8. Clean the outside of the product with a damp cloth.

HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series

Approximately three hours

Approximately three hours

New features—HP PageWide Technology

HP PageWide Technology offers the following advantages:

 High print speeds and fast first page out.

NOTE: The course library contains a technical white paper describing HP PageWide

HP Officejet Pro X451dn SFP

 Prints up to 36 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Prints up to 55 pages per minute (general office mode)

 2.0-inch MGD (monochrome graphics) adjustable angle display

 Hi-speed USB 2.0

 HP ePrint via email

HP Officejet Pro X451dw SFP

 Prints up to 36 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Prints up to 55 pages per minute (general office mode)

 2.0-inch MGD (monochrome graphics) adjustable angle display

 HP ePrint via email

HP Officejet Pro X551dw SFP

 Prints up to 42 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Prints up to 70 pages per minute (general office mode)

 4.3-inch color graphics touchscreen adjustable angle display

 Hi-speed USB 2.0

 HP Wireless Direct printing

HP Officejet Pro X476dn MFP

 Prints up to 43 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Prints up to 55 pages per minute (general office mode)

 v.34 with an RJ-11 fax port

 4.3-inch color graphics touchscreen adjustable angle display

 Hi-speed USB 2.0

HP Officejet Pro X476dw MFP

 Prints up to 36 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Automatic duplex scanning

 v.34 with an RJ-11 fax port

 4.3-inch color graphics touchscreen adjustable angle display

 Hi-speed USB 2.0

 HP Wireless Direct printing

HP Officejet Pro X576dw MFP

 Prints up to 42 pages per minute (ISO)

Memory and storage

 Prints up to 70 pages per minute (general office mode)

 Automatic duplex scanning

 v.34 with an RJ-11 fax port

 4.3-inch color graphics touchscreen adjustable angle display

 Hi-speed USB 2.0

 HP Wireless Direct printing

 HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series

Model name/Model X451dn/

Optional Tray 3 (500-

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 √ √ √

10/100 Ethernet LAN

801.11 B/G/N Single

Plug and Print USB

HP Officejet Pro X476 and X576 MFP Series

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 √ √ √

Plug and Print USB

Copy and Scan √ √ √

Paper handling overview

 The HP Officejet Pro X451 and X551 Series and HP Officejet Pro X476 and